BMC® Remedy® Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
User’s Guide 
June 2006 
Part No: 60845
Copyright 1991–2006 BMC Software, Inc. All rights reserved. 
BMC, the BMC logo, all other BMC product or service names, BMC Software, the BMC Software logos, and 
all other BMC Software product or service names, are registered trademarks or trademarks of BMC 
Software, Inc. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. 
BMC Software, Inc., considers information included in this documentation to be proprietary and 
confidential. Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable end user 
license agreement or nondisclosure agreement for the product and the proprietary and restricted rights 
notices included in this documentation. 
For license information about the OpenSource files used in the licensed program, please read 
OpenSourceLicenses.pdf. This file is in the Doc folder of the distribution CD-ROM and in the 
documentation download portion of the product download page. 
Restricted Rights Legend 
U.S. Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software. UNPUBLISHED -- RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE 
COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES. Use, duplication, or disclosure of any data and computer software by the 
U.S. Government is subject to restrictions, as applicable, set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14, DFARS 252.227-7013, DFARS 
252.227-7014, DFARS 252.227-7015, and DFARS 252.227-7025, as amended from time to time. Contractor/Manufacturer is 
BMC Software, Inc., 2101 CityWest Blvd., Houston, TX 77042-2827, USA. Any contract notices should be sent to this address. 
Contacting Us 
If you need technical support for this product, contact Customer Support by email at 
support@remedy.com. If you have comments or suggestions about this documentation, contact 
Information Development by email at doc_feedback@bmc.com. 
This edition applies to version 7.0 of the licensed program. 
BMC Software, Inc. 
www.bmc.com
Contents ! 3 
Contents 
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 
Best Practice and New icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 
About the BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite. . . . . . . . . . . 10 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 
BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
BMC Remedy Problem Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
BMC Service Level Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 
BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite documents . . . . . . . . . . 13 
Chapter 1 Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 . . . . . . . 17 
Installing and configuring Incident Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
Incident Management user roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 
Requester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 
Support staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 
Incident manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 
Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 
Chapter 2 Using functions common to all ITSM applications . . . . . . . . . 27 
Opening the main application console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 
Using BMC Remedy User client to open a main console . . . . . . . . . 28
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
4 "Contents 
Using a browser to open a main console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 
Working with the Overview console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 
Opening the Overview console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 
Using the Assigned Work table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 
Viewing and creating broadcast messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 
Using the navigation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 
Using quick actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 
Auto-filling fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 
Working with records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 
Searching for records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 
Printing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 
Modifying records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 
Working with relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 
Defining relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 
Copying relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 
Indicating impacted areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 
Modifying relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 
Performing quick actions on a relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 
Removing relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 
Adding work information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 
Creating reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 
Broadcasting messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 
Creating broadcast messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 
Viewing broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 
Sending pages and email messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 
Paging a person or on-call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 
Sending email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 
Working with reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 
Generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 
Using qualifications to generate a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 
Generating a report using saved qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 
Chapter 3 Working with the Requester console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 
Requester role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 
Service Request Management users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 
Understanding the Requester console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
User’s Guide 
Opening the Requester console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 
Functional areas and tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 
Working with service requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
Creating a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
Filtering service requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 
Viewing a service request record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 
Modifying a service request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 
Searching for service requests by Request ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 
Printing a service request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 
Canceling a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 
Reopening a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 
Completing surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 
Viewing service requests with errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 
Working with service requests as the Request Master . . . . . . . . . . . 91 
Opening a service request record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 
Reopening a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 
Viewing or adding work information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 
Viewing the event log and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 
Service Request form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 
Working with the Solution database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 
Viewing broadcast messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 
Chapter 4 Working with Incident Management as support staff . . . . . . 103 
Understanding the Support Console tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 
Setting application preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 
Recording a new incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 
Using the Process Flow Status wizard to record a new incident . . . . . . 109 
Using a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 
Using the decision tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 
Using scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 
Relating incidents as duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 
Recording CI unavailability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 
Adding or modifying a customer profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 
Understanding assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 
Receiving notification of assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 
Working with assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 
Contents ! 5
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
6 "Contents 
Reassigning an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 
Working with tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 
Investigating and diagnosing an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 
Viewing an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
Searching for a solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 
Recording the cost of working on an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 
Resolving an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 
Creating a problem investigation from an incident . . . . . . . . . . . 144 
Creating infrastructure change from an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 
Reopening a resolved incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 
Closing an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 
Creating known errors and solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 
Creating a known error from an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 
Creating a solution database entry from an incident . . . . . . . . . . 150 
Chapter 5 Working with Incident Management as a manager . . . . . . . 153 
Understanding the Manager Console tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 
Managing assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 
Viewing unassigned incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 
Assigning an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 
Monitoring an incident's status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 
Reopening a closed incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 
Understanding SLM calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 
Understanding notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 
Viewing the audit log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 
Chapter 6 Managing configuration items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 
Creating a CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 
Creating a computer system CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 
Creating a bulk inventory CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 
Creating an inventory location CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 
Managing inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 
Viewing inventory locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 
Relocating CIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 
Reserving and using inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
User’s Guide 
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 
Contents ! 7
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
8 "Contents
Preface ! 9 
Preface 
The BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 User’s Guide 
describes how to use the BMC® Remedy® Incident Management application. 
Incident Management is one of five BMC Remedy IT Service Management 
applications. 
The BMC® Remedy® IT Service Management Suite 
(BMC® Remedy® ITSM Suite) includes: 
! The BMC® Remedy® Asset Management application. 
! The BMC® Remedy® Change Management application. 
! The BMC® Remedy® Service Desk solution (which includes the 
BMC® Remedy® Incident Management application and the 
BMC® Remedy® Problem Management application). 
! The BMC® Service Level Management application. 
The applications run in conjunction with the BMC® Remedy® Action 
Request System® platform (BMC® Remedy® AR System® platform) and 
share a common database. All five applications consume data from the 
BMC® Atrium® Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Best Practice and New icons 
10 "Preface 
Documentation for the BMC Remedy ITSM Suite contains two icons. 
Icon Description 
The New icon identifies features or 
products that are new or enhanced with 
version 7.0. 
The Best Practice icon highlights 
processes or approaches that BMC has 
identified as the most effective way to 
leverage certain features in the suite. 
About the BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite 
There have been several updates to the BMC Remedy ITSM Suite since 
version 6.0. 
Note the change to the BMC® Remedy® Help Desk application. BMC is now 
offering the BMC Remedy Service Desk solution, which contains the 
following applications: 
! BMC Remedy Incident Management 
! BMC Remedy Problem Management 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 is installed with Asset Management, Change 
Management, and Service Desk (including Incident Management and 
Problem Management). It stores information about configuration items and 
their relationships in an inheritance-based data model, and has the ability to 
reconcile data from different sources. BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 provides a 
“single source of truth” about your IT environment, enabling other BMC 
applications to manage CIs, predict the impact of configuration changes, and 
perform other Business Service Management (BSM) functions. 
For more information, see the BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 User’s Guide.
User’s Guide 
BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 
The BMC Remedy Asset Management application lets IT professionals track 
and manage enterprise configuration items (CIs)—and their changing 
relationships—throughout the entire CI life cycle. As part of the BMC 
Remedy ITSM Suite, Asset Management is integrated with BMC Remedy 
Service Desk (which contains the BMC Remedy Incident Management and 
BMC Remedy Problem Management applications), BMC Remedy Change 
Management, and BMC Service Level Management, and offers flexibility to 
support customized business processes. 
For more information, see the BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 User’s 
Guide. 
BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 
Using ITIL-compatible best practices, BMC Remedy Change Management 
provides IT organizations with the ability to manage changes by enabling 
them to assess impact, risk, and resource requirements, and then create plans 
and automate approval functions for implementing changes. It provides 
scheduling and task assignment functionality, and reporting capabilities for 
reviewing performance and improving processes. Because Change 
Management is integrated with BMC Atrium CMDB, Change Management 
lets you relate changes to other records, such as configuration items 
(including services) and incidents. 
For more information, see the BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s 
Guide. 
BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 
BMC Remedy Incident Management is used to manage incidents. Incident 
management is reactive, and is typically initiated in response to a customer 
call or automated event. An example of an automated event might be an alert 
from a monitoring system, such as BMC® Service Impact Management 
(BMC® SIM). The primary goal of the incident management process, 
according to ITIL standards, is “to restore normal service operation as 
quickly as possible with minimum disruption to the business, thus ensuring 
that the best achievable levels of availability and service are maintained.” 
About the BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite ! 11
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
12 "Preface 
An incident is any event that is not part of the standard operation of a service 
and that causes an interruption to or a reduction in the quality of that service. 
Normal service operation is the operation of services within the limits 
specified by Service Level Management (SLM). 
For more information, see the BMC Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
User’s Guide. 
BMC Remedy Problem Management 7.0 
BMC Remedy Problem Management is used to manage problem 
investigations, known errors, and solution database entries. Problem 
management can proactively prevent the occurrence of incidents, errors, and 
additional problems. A problem investigation helps an IT organization get to 
the root cause of incidents. It initiates actions that help to improve or correct 
the situation, preventing the incident from recurring. 
After a problem investigation identifies the cause, this information can result 
in either a known error or a solution database entry. A known error is a 
problem that has been successfully diagnosed and for which a temporary 
work-around or permanent solution has been identified. A solution database 
entry contains information that might be required to provide or restore a 
service. 
For more information, see the BMC Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 
User’s Guide. 
BMC Service Level Management 7.0 
BMC Service Level Management enables a service provider, such as an IT 
organization, a customer support group, or an external service provider, to 
formally document the needs of its customers or lines of business using 
service level agreements, and provide the correct level of service to meet those 
needs. 
Service Level Management also provides a means to review, enforce, and 
report on the level of service provided. It streamlines the most important task 
of all, which is the communication between a service provider and its 
customers. Multiple service targets can be defined and monitored, acting as 
a bridge between IT service support and IT operations. This enables costs to 
be controlled and helps to provide a consistent level of service in support of 
a key business service.
User’s Guide 
For more information, see the BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User’s 
Guide. 
Audience ! 13 
Audience 
Incident Management is intended for the following IT professionals: 
! IT support staff 
! IT managers 
The Requester console is intended for any IT user. 
BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite documents 
The following table lists the documentation available for the BMC Remedy 
ITSM Suite. 
Unless otherwise noted, online documentation in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) 
format is available on product installation CDs, on the Customer Support 
website (http://supportweb.remedy.com), or both. You can order printed 
documentation from SMBU-Upgrade@bmc.com. 
Note: To access the support website, you must have a support contract. 
You can access application Help by clicking on Help links within the 
application. 
Title Document provides Audience Format 
ITSM Configuration Quick Start Start with this reference card to quickly 
install and configure applications in the 
ITSM suite. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Action Request 
System 7.0 Concepts 
Concepts for using the Action Request 
System. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Action Request 
System 7.0 Installing 
Procedures for installing the Action 
Request System. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 
Common Data Model Diagram 
Hierarchical diagram of all classes in the 
CDM, including unique attributes and 
applicable relationships. 
Administrators PDF
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Title Document provides Audience Format 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 
Common Data Model Help 
14 "Preface 
Description and details of superclasses, 
subclasses, attributes, and relationships 
for each class. 
Administrators HTML 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 
Concepts and Best Practices Guide 
Information about CMDB concepts and 
best practices for planning your BMC 
Atrium CMDB implementation. 
Executives and 
administrators 
Print and 
PDF 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 
Developer’s Reference Guide 
Information about creating API 
programs, C and Web Services API 
functions and data structures, and a list 
of error messages. 
Administrators 
and 
programmers 
PDF 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Help Help for using and configuring BMC 
Atrium CMDB. 
Users and 
administrators 
Product 
Help 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 
Installation and Configuration 
Guide 
Information about installing and 
configuring BMC Atrium CMDB, 
including permissions, class definitions, 
reconciliation, and federation. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Javadoc 
API Help 
Information about Java classes, methods, 
and variables that integrate with BMC 
Atrium CMDB. 
Programmers HTML 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Master 
Index 
Combined index of all books. Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Release 
Notes 
Information about new features and 
known issues. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 User’s 
Guide 
Information about using BMC Atrium 
CMDB, including searching for CIs and 
relationships, launching federated data, 
reporting, and running reconciliation 
jobs. 
Users Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy 7.0 Approval Server 
Guide for Users and 
Administrators 
Topics on installation and configuration 
of the Approval Server, how to use the 
Approval Server, and understanding the 
approval workflow. 
Users and 
administrators 
Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy IT Service 
Management 7.0 Configuration 
Guide 
Procedures for configuring the BMC 
Remedy IT Service Management 
applications. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF
User’s Guide 
Title Document provides Audience Format 
BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite documents ! 15 
BMC Remedy IT Service 
Management 7.0 Installation 
Guide 
Procedures for installing the BMC 
Remedy IT Service Management 
applications and solutions: BMC 
Remedy Service Desk solution (BMC 
Remedy Incident Management and BMC 
Remedy Problem Management), BMC 
Remedy Change Management, and BMC 
Remedy Asset Management. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Asset 
Management 7.0 Help 
Help for using BMC Remedy Asset 
Management. 
Everyone Product 
Help 
BMC Remedy Asset Management 
7.0 Release Notes 
Information about known issues in each 
release of BMC Remedy Asset 
Management. Also provides a list of new 
features included with the application. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Asset Management 
7.0 User’s Guide 
Procedures for using the BMC Remedy 
Asset Management application; includes 
new features and overview. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Change 
Management 7.0 Help 
Help for using BMC Remedy Change 
Management. 
Everyone Product 
Help 
BMC Remedy Change 
Management 7.0 Release Notes 
Information about known issues in each 
release of BMC Remedy Change 
Management. Also provides a list of new 
features included with the application. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Change 
Management 7.0 User’s Guide 
Procedures for using the BMC Remedy 
Change Management application; 
includes new features and overview. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Service Desk 7.0 
Release Notes 
Information about known issues in each 
release of BMC Remedy Service Desk: 
Incident Management and BMC Remedy 
Service Desk: Problem Management. 
Also provides a list of new features 
included with the application. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy Service Desk: 
Incident Management 7.0 Help 
Help for using BMC Remedy Incident 
Management. 
Everyone Product 
Help 
BMC Remedy Service Desk: 
Incident Management 7.0 User’s 
Guide 
Procedures for using the BMC Remedy 
Service Desk: Incident Management 
application; includes new features and 
overview. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Title Document provides Audience Format 
BMC Remedy Service Desk: 
Problem Management 7.0 Help 
16 "Preface 
Help for using BMC Remedy Problem 
Management. 
Everyone Product 
Help 
BMC Remedy Service Desk: 
Problem Management 7.0 User’s 
Guide 
Procedures for using the BMC Remedy 
Service Desk: Problem Management 
application; includes new features and 
overview. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Service Level Management 
7.0 Configuration Guide 
Procedures for configuring the BMC 
Service Level Management application. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Service Level Management 
7.0 Configuration Help 
Help for configuring the BMC Service 
Level Management application. 
Administrators Product 
Help 
BMC Service Level Management 
7.0 Installation Guide 
Procedures for installing the BMC 
Service Level Management application. 
Administrators Print and 
PDF 
BMC Service Level Management 
7.0 Release Notes 
Information about known issues in each 
release of BMC Service Level 
Management. Also provides a list of new 
features included with the application. 
Everyone PDF 
BMC Service Level Management 
7.0 User Help 
Help for using the BMC Service Level 
Management application. 
Everyone Product 
Help 
BMC Service Level Management 
7.0 User’s Guide 
Procedures for using the BMC Service 
Level Management application; includes 
new features and overview. 
Everyone Print and 
PDF 
BMC Remedy 7.0 Task 
Management Administrator’s 
Guide 
Procedures to configure Task 
Management. 
Note: This guide also includes steps to 
configure seamless authentication 
between BMC Remedy Change 
Management and the other 
components of BMC Remedy Change 
and Configuration Management 
(CCM). 
Administrators Print and 
PDF
Chapter 1 Introducing BMC Remedy 
Incident Management 7.0 
The Service Desk: Incident Management application is used to manage 
incidents. Incident management is reactive, and is typically initiated in 
response to a customer call. The primary goal of the incident management 
process, according to ITIL standards, is “to restore normal service operation 
as quickly as possible with minimum disruption to the business, thus 
ensuring that the best achievable levels of availability and service are 
maintained.” 
An incident is any event that is not part of the standard operation of a service 
and that causes an interruption to or a reduction in the quality of that service. 
Normal service operation is the operation of services within the limits 
specified by the service target. 
The following topics are provided: 
! Installing and configuring Incident Management (page 18) 
! What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 (page 18) 
! Incident Management user roles (page 21) 
! Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request (page 24) 
Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 ! 17
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Installing and configuring Incident Management 
Your administrator installs and configures Incident Management. For 
details, see: 
! BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Installation Guide 
! BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide 
What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 
The new features in this release of Incident Management include: 
! Improved ITIL conformance—A new process flow tool helps you follow 
ITIL processes for incident management. 
! Enhanced user interface—The user interface is now more consistent with 
other BMC applications. To help speed use of the application, forms and 
dialog boxes have been streamlined, and Quick Action accelerators have 
been added. 
! Role-based consoles—Support staff, managers, and requesters have 
separate consoles. The Requester console provides customer access. 
! Permission model—Permissions and functional roles have been 
enhanced to provide greater flexibility in setting up user access. For 
details, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration 
Guide. 
! Task management—You can assign tasks to one or more people without 
changing the incident assignment. For previous users of Incident 
Management, this replaces the work log action feature. Now you can 
assign and view tasks without going into the work log. 
! Direct view into CMDB—This allows you to manage configuration items 
(CIs) from Incident Management. 
! Cost tracking—The cost for each incident can be tracked as the incident 
moves between support groups for diagnosis, resolution, and closure, 
based on either flat-rate or time-based costs. 
18 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
User’s Guide 
! Reporting—Incident Management now includes the reports described in 
Report Description 
Group Assignment to Incidents This report lists incidents and their 
What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 ! 19 
the following table. 
! Service Level Management—If Service Level Management is installed, the 
Incident form displays the status of service targets. 
! Enhanced audit log—You can now filter the audit log, for example, to see 
only date field audit records or assignment changes. 
! Terminology changes—You can find terminology changes in the 
following table. 
assigned support groups for a 
specified date range. 
Open Incident volume by Assignee This bar chart displays the number of 
open incidents for each assignee. 
Incidents by activity times This report lists all open incidents and 
the amount of time since the reported 
date. 
Resolved and Closed Incident Volume 
by Assignee 
This bar chart displays the number of 
resolved and closed incidents for each 
assignee. 
Change induced incidents This report lists incidents that were 
caused by changes. 
Note: This report is available only if 
Change Management is installed. 
Table 1-1: Key terminology changes in Incident Management 
Previous term New term 
Associate Relate 
Associations Relationships 
Automatic Routing Auto Assign 
Delete Remove—This change applies only to the 
Relationship and Financial tabs, to clarify 
the action being performed. 
Service Categorization Operational Categorization
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
What’s new for 
Help Desk 
users? 
Table 1-1: Key terminology changes in Incident Management 
Previous term New term 
Work Log Work Info 
Work Log Action Task 
This release replaces BMC® Remedy® Help Desk with Incident Management 
and Problem Management. New Incident Management features for former 
Help Desk users include the features mentioned in the previous paragraphs, 
and also the following features: 
! Enhanced problem management—Problem investigations have a 
separate form. Problem Management includes new processes to manage 
the life cycle of a problem investigation and known errors, and to record 
solution database entries. 
! Navigation pane—Located on the left side of consoles and forms, this 
provides access to common functions, such as assigning an incident to 
yourself. 
! Multi-tenancy—This makes it possible to host multiple companies and 
their data on a single server. This feature can also be used for any groups, 
such as business units or departments, whose data must be kept separate. 
Multi-tenancy is limited to the company level in Incident Management. 
Configuration can differ on a per-company basis. Multi-tenancy from the 
user’s perspective is accessed by selecting the appropriate company from 
the list next to the Company field. 
! Incident matching—From the Incident form, users can perform searches 
for known errors, solution database entries, problem investigations, and 
other incidents that match criteria from the current incident to assist in 
the incident resolution process. 
! Categorization—This is recorded separately for operational and product 
categorization, each with multiple levels to provide greater flexibility. Due 
to multi-tenancy, each company or business unit can be configured with 
its own categorization. 
! Decision tree—This takes the user step-by-step through a questionnaire, 
and, based on answers, completes part of the form for a new incident. A 
manager or administrator can build decision trees. 
20 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
User’s Guide 
! Scripts—These are detailed instructions that an administrator or manager 
sets up to help users record important information about an incident. 
Scripts can be used when recording or assigning an incident. 
! Incident templates—These can be used to populate incident records with 
standard information that is entered on a regular basis. A template can 
also set a relationship to a configuration item (CI). An administrator can 
create templates for commonly occurring incidents, as described in the 
BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 
! Prioritization—Incident priority is now determined by impact and 
urgency. This can be configured by an administrator, as described in the 
BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 
! Terminology changes—You can find a terminology change in the 
Table 1-2: Key terminology change between Help Desk and Incident Management 
Help Desk term Incident Management term 
Bulletin Board Broadcast 
Incident Management user roles ! 21 
following table. 
Incident Management user roles 
Incident Management provides functionality for IT users with the requester 
role, for support staff, and for managers. 
Important: The permission model in Incident Management has had several 
updates since version 6.0. To define permissions and functional roles, 
review the permissions and functional roles sections in the BMC Remedy 
IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 
Requester 
IT users can request resolution of incidents through the Requester console. 
This console gives requesters access to: 
! Public broadcast messages. 
! Their own incident and change requests. 
! A satisfaction survey, which can be completed on resolution of an incident 
or change request.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
The Requester console provides access based on the following permissions: 
! Request Console Master—This user is responsible for configuring the 
Requester console. The request console master can view all the requests 
submitted by other users. This user is more of an administrator than a 
support user. 
! Registered User—This user has a record in the People form, and the user’s 
login information is in the Login/Access Details tab of the People form. 
! Guest User—All other users are considered to be guest users even if a user 
has a record in the People form. If a user’s login information does not exist 
in the user record, then the user is considered a guest user. Guest users 
cannot create change requests. 
Support staff 
First-line support staff are members of the Service Desk. They are the 
primary contacts for all customers and are responsible for recording 
incidents and coordinating their resolution. Typically, the first-line support 
staff own all incidents and are therefore responsible for validating incident 
resolutions with their customers. 
Second-line and third-line support are considered subject matter experts. 
Their main responsibility is to provide an accurate analysis and diagnosis of 
their assigned incidents to restore service to the affected customers. 
Support staff responsibilities include: 
! Creating, classifying, and updating incident records. 
! Verifying the Customer Profile data and updating the information if 
appropriate. 
! Relating CIs to the incident. 
! Escalating incidents that need to be resolved based on SLM terms or 
perception of urgency. 
! Resolving incidents or assigning for resolution. 
! Coordinating and validating resolutions with customers. 
! Closing incidents and determining customer satisfaction. 
22 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
User’s Guide 
Support can also participate in the problem management process, as 
described in the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s 
Guide. They can also participate in the change management process, as 
described in the BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 
Incident Management user roles ! 23 
Incident manager 
Incident managers are responsible for the quality and integrity of the 
incident management processes. Support group leads and managers are 
responsible for the work of members of their support group. They coordinate 
the assignment of incidents to support staff. 
Their responsibilities include: 
! Monitoring incidents. 
! Monitoring open incidents requiring assignment. 
! Managing the assignment of incidents to their appropriate support groups 
for resolution. 
! Receiving notifications of incident assignments and escalations. 
! Facilitating the resolution of escalated incidents in accordance with the 
escalation policy. 
! Ensuring the resolution of incidents within the support group's service 
targets. 
! Ensuring the overall completeness and accuracy of closed incidents. 
! Reviewing reports. 
! Ensuring that incidents requiring root cause analysis are copied into 
Problem Management. 
! Managing support group membership. 
! Managing scripts, templates, and decision trees.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request 
The Process Flow Status area displays the process flow of the incident request 
within the Incident form. A diagram shows the five stages of an incident 
request, as indicated by best practices, rooted in ITIL processes. The current 
stage of the incident is highlighted. The status of the incident is indicated by 
both color and text. 
Figure 1-1: Example of selecting an accelerator from the Process Flow Status wizard 
The Process Flow Status area also serves as a wizard, guiding you through the 
stages of the incident life cycle. At each stage, the diagram provides 
accelerators applicable to the current stage. For example, you can use 
accelerators to move the incident to a pending state or to the next stage. 
When you select an accelerator, a dialog box appears, prompting you to enter 
the data required to complete the task. You can also enter optional 
recommended data in the dialog box. By using the process flow accelerators, 
you are following ITIL best practices. 
Process Flow 
Status area 
Current stage 
24 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
User’s Guide 
Figure 1-2: Selecting an accelerator from the Process Flow Status wizard 
Figure 1-3: Example of form displayed by Process Flow Status wizard 
Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request ! 25
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Table 1-3: The five stages of an incident request 
Incident stage Description Tasks 
Identification 
and recording 
This stage initiates the incident 
management process. The purpose of 
this stage is to accurately record and 
recognize disruptions to services 
provided by IT to its customers. For 
details, see “Recording a new incident” 
on page 108. 
26 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 
! Next stage 
! Enter pending (or 
resume) 
! Select template 
Investigation 
and diagnosis 
In this stage, you can search existing 
information to identify a possible 
solution. If the incident cannot be 
resolved or a root cause analysis is 
required, you can escalate the incident 
to problem management. For details, 
see “Investigating and diagnosing an 
incident” on page 132. 
Next stage 
! Generate problem 
! Generate change 
! Relate CI 
! Enter pending (or 
resume) 
Note: Generate change is 
available only as a task 
if Change 
Management is 
installed. 
Resolution and 
recovery 
In this stage, you resolve and recover 
from the service disruption to enable 
the customer to resume work. For 
details, see “Resolving an incident” on 
page 141. 
! Next stage 
! Generate problem 
! Generate change 
! Enter pending (or 
resume) 
Incident closure In this stage, you make sure that the 
incident has successfully restored the 
service to the customer and that the 
customer is satisfied with the outcome. 
For details, see “Closing an incident” 
on page 147. 
! Reopen 
! Close 
Closed In this stage the incident is closed. No 
further activities are performed on the 
incident. 
None
Chapter 2 Using functions common to all 
ITSM applications 
This section contains basic procedures that are common to most forms and 
consoles. Most of the information in this section is similar throughout the 
ITSM suite. 
The following topics are provided: 
! Opening the main application console (page 28) 
! Working with the Overview console (page 31) 
! Working with records (page 38) 
! Working with relationships (page 43) 
! Adding work information (page 51) 
! Creating reminders (page 53) 
! Sending pages and email messages (page 60) 
! Working with reports (page 65) 
Using functions common to all ITSM applications ! 27
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Opening the main application console 
You start an ITSM application by opening its main console. How you do this 
depends on whether you want to view the console through the 
BMC® Remedy® User client or through a browser. See the following 
instructions for information about opening the main console. 
Using BMC Remedy User client to open a main console 
This section describes how to open an application’s main console from the 
IT Home page, by way of BMC Remedy User. 
" To open the application’s main console from the BMC Remedy User 
tool 
1 Choose Start > Programs > Action Request System > BMC Remedy User. 
The Login dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-1: Login dialog box 
2 Perform the following steps: 
a In the User Name field, type your user name. 
b In the Password field, enter your password. 
28 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
c In the Preference Server field, specify the server name if your 
administrator set up a preference server for centralized user preferences. 
For example, if you have a report server from which you can access 
predefined reports, you specify it here. 
Opening the main application console ! 29 
3 Click OK to log in. 
The Home Page form opens automatically. If it does not, perform the 
following steps in BMC Remedy User: 
a Choose Tools > Options. 
b In the Options dialog box, click the Home Page tab. 
Figure 2-2: Home Page tab on the Options dialog box
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
c Select the check box to open the home page automatically. 
4 When the IT Home page opens, click the Incident Management Console link 
from the navigation pane. 
Figure 2-3: IT Home page 
Navigation pane 
Incident 
Management 
Console link 
Using a browser to open a main console 
This section describes how to open the Incident Management console from 
a browser. 
" To open a main console from a browser 
1 Type the following URL in to your browser’s address bar: 
http://<web_server>:<port>/arsys/apps/<arsystem_server>/Home Page 
where: 
<web_server> is the fully qualified name of the BMC Remedy Mid Tier 
system, specified in the format server_name.company.com. 
<port> is an optional port number, which is needed if the web server is not 
on the default port (port 80). 
<arsystem_server> is the name of your BMC Remedy AR System server. 
30 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
For a list of supported browsers, see the compatibility matrix at: 
http://supportweb.remedy.com/Rem/IssuesAndSolutions/ 
CompatibilityMatrix/index.jsp 
2 Enter your user name and password, then click Login. 
3 When the IT Home page opens, click the Incident Management Console link 
in the navigation pane. 
For an illustration of the IT Home page, see Figure 2-3 on page 30. 
Working with the Overview console 
The Overview console is the primary interface for support staff. It provides 
quick access to the information you need and to the procedures that you 
perform most often. 
This section discusses how to use the Overview console. 
Figure 2-4: BMC Remedy IT Service Management Overview console 
Working with the Overview console ! 31
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Opening the Overview console 
The BMC Remedy IT Service Management Overview console provides quick 
access to commonly performed functions. 
" To open the Overview console from your desktop 
1 Open BMC Remedy User as described in “Using BMC Remedy User client to 
open a main console” on page 28. 
2 On the Home Page form, under the Remedy Foundation Elements heading, 
click the Overview Console link. 
The Overview console appears. 
" To open the Overview console from a browser 
1 Launch your browser as described in “Using a browser to open a main 
console” on page 30. 
2 On the Home Page form, under the Remedy Foundation Elements heading, 
click the Overview Console link. 
The Overview console appears. 
Using the Assigned Work table 
The Assigned Work table lists different types of records. The types of records 
that you can select depend on the BMC Remedy applications that are 
installed. 
Each type of record is identified by a specific prefix: 
! CHG—Identifies change requests. BMC Remedy Change Management 
must be installed for you to be able to create and view change requests. 
! SDB—Identifies solution database entries. BMC Remedy Problem 
Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view 
solution entries. 
! TAS—Identifies tasks. Tasks can be attached to incidents, problem 
investigations, or change requests. 
! INC—Identifies incidents. BMC Remedy Incident Management must be 
installed for you to be able to create and view incidents. 
32 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
! PBI—Identifies problems. BMC Remedy Problem Management must be 
installed for you to be able to create and view problems. 
! PKE—Identifies known errors. BMC Remedy Problem Management 
must be installed for you to be able to create and view known errors. 
! PR—Identifies purchase requisitions. BMC Remedy Asset Management 
must be installed for you to be able to create and view purchase 
requisitions. 
You can also change the table’s contents by using the Company filter and 
Console View fields at the top left corner of the console: 
! Company—Shows records associated with a particular company (useful 
Working with the Overview console ! 33 
in a multi-tenancy environment). 
! Personal—Shows all the records that are assigned to you. 
! Selected Groups—The options below this heading apply to records that 
are assigned to your support groups. When you select an option for 
selected groups, you are prompted to select from all support groups for 
which you are a member. 
! Show All—Shows all records for the groups you select. 
! Show Unassigned—Shows all the records that are unassigned to an 
individual, but which are assigned to the groups you select. 
! All My Groups—Shows all the records that are assigned to all support 
groups that you belong to. If you belong to more than one support group, 
the records for all those groups appear. 
! Show All—Shows all records. 
! Show Unassigned—Shows all the records that are unassigned. 
In the Windows environment, if there are more records than the application 
can show in the table, you can see the next grouping of entries by placing the 
pointer in the table and right-clicking, then clicking either Next or Prev. 
When using a browser, use the arrow keys at the top corner of the table. 
You can create new records by clicking the Create button that appears below 
the table.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Creating records 
From the Overview console, you can create new records for the various ITSM 
applications installed on your system. The types of requests you can create 
from the Overview console depend on the applications you have installed. 
" To create records 
1 From the Overview console, click Create. 
The Select Request Type dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-5: Select Request Type dialog box 
2 From the Request Type list, select the type of record you want to create. 
Note: The available request types depend on which ITSM applications are 
installed on your system. 
3 Click Select. 
The New form of the application appropriate to the type of record you are 
creating appears. 
4 Enter all the required information to create the request. 
For details on creating a new incident, see “Recording a new incident” on 
page 108. For more information about creating other types of records, see the 
related application’s user guide. 
34 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Searching for records 
From the Overview console, you can search for records from the various 
ITSM applications installed on your system. The types of records you can 
search for depend on the applications you have installed. 
" To search for records 
1 From the Overview console, click Search. 
The Select Request Type dialog box appears. 
2 From the Request Type list, select the type of record for which you want to 
Working with the Overview console ! 35 
search. 
Note: The request types available depend on which ITSM applications are 
installed on your system. 
3 Click Select. 
A search dialog box appropriate to the type of record for which you are 
searching appears. 
4 Enter search criteria as needed to search for the record. 
For more information about searching for records, see “Searching for 
records” on page 38. 
Refreshing data 
After you create or modify a record, click Refresh to see the latest changes in 
the Assigned Work table. The Refresh button is located in the top right 
corner of the console. 
If you have changed the search criteria, you can return to your defaults by 
clicking Set to Defaults.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Viewing and creating broadcast messages 
Use the Broadcast feature, on the lower portion of the console, to view and 
create messages that can be viewed by the entire organization or by users in 
the support, approver, management, and administrator groups. For 
information about using Broadcasts, see “Broadcasting messages” on 
page 55. 
Using the navigation pane 
The pane on the left side of the console is the navigation pane. 
Changing the console view 
The links under Console View help you filter records that appear in the 
Assigned Work table. For more information about using the Console View 
functions, see “Using the Assigned Work table” on page 32. 
Using console functions 
The following links are under the Console Functions heading: 
! Select Status Values—Lets you see only those records in a certain state, 
which you specify from the Select Status Values dialog box. See “Selecting 
status values” on page 37. 
! My Profile—Lets you set your profile. See “Viewing your profile” on 
page 37. 
! Application Preferences—Lets you set your application preferences and 
options. This function is also available from the Incident Management 
console, as described in “Setting application preferences” on page 106. 
Opening other applications 
Use the Other Applications links to open other, available ITSM applications. 
The links that appear under the Other Applications heading are determined 
by the applications that are installed on your system: 
! Incident Management—Opens the Incident Management application. 
! Change Management—Opens the Change Management application. 
! Problem Management—Opens the Problem Management application. 
36 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
! Asset Management—Opens the Asset Management application. 
! Approval—Allows you to view all requests pending approval. 
! CMDB—Opens the BMC Atrium CMDB Class Manager console. 
! SLM—Opens the Service Level Management application. 
Selecting status values 
You can use the Select Status Values dialog box to filter the requests that 
appear in the Overview console based on their status. 
" To select status values 
1 From the navigation pane in the Overview console, choose Console 
Functions > Select Status Values. 
The Select Status Values dialog box appears. 
2 Select the status values for each category from the lists, then click OK. 
Working with the Overview console ! 37 
The dialog box closes. 
3 If the Assigned Work table does not refresh with the filtered records, click 
Refresh to reload the table’s contents. 
Viewing your profile 
You can view and modify your personal profile. When you click My Profile, 
the People (Search) form appears. In this form, you can: 
! Update company information such as organization, business, and home 
address, and so on. 
! View permissions. 
For detailed information about the People form, see the BMC Remedy IT 
Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 
" To modify your profile 
1 From the navigation pane, choose Console Functions > My Profile. 
The People form appears. 
2 Update the information at the top of the form, or click the tab corresponding 
to the area in which you want to change the profile information.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Make your changes by selecting from the various lists that are available. 
3 When you finish making the changes, click Save. 
Using quick actions 
The Overview console lets you perform certain quick actions. From the 
Quick Actions list, select the appropriate action, then click Execute. 
! Print—Lets you select records and print their contents. See “Printing 
records” on page 41. 
! Home Page—Opens the Home Page. 
Auto-filling fields 
As you work with the forms and dialog boxes, you might see a plus sign (+) 
included in a field label. You can type part of the information next to these 
fields and press ENTER. If an exact match is located, the application 
automatically completes the field. If a selection list appears, double-click the 
item you want to put in the field. Using auto-fill fields and lists is faster, more 
consistent, and more accurate than typing the information. 
Working with records 
This section discusses some of the common functions related to record 
handling. 
Searching for records 
Two types of searches are available from the Incident Management console. 
One type of search looks only through records that are in some way 
associated with you through your login ID or group ID (for example, records 
created by you, assigned to you or to your support group, and so on) and that 
meet your specific search criteria. You execute this type of search from the 
Search area near the top of the console. For a description of how to run this 
type of search, see “Searching your records” on page 39. 
38 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Note: To view the support groups you belong to, from the navigation pane, 
choose Console Functions > My Profile, then on your profile click the 
Support Groups tab. For more information about this function, see 
“Viewing your profile” on page 37. 
The other type of search looks through all of the records that meet your 
search criteria, regardless of their associations to people or groups. You run 
this type of search by using the Search Incident link in the navigation pane of 
the Incident Management console. For a description of how to run this type 
of search, see “Searching all records” on page 41. 
Searching your records 
The following procedure describes how to search the application for records 
associated with you or your group and that meet your specific search criteria. 
Use this type of search when you are looking for a record that you know is 
associated with your ID or with your group’s ID. 
" To search records assigned to your groups 
1 From the console Search area, select your search criteria from the various 
Working with records ! 39 
selection boxes. 
Figure 2-6: Search Criteria area 
Note: The most commonly searched-upon record fields appear in the Search 
Criteria area of the console. More record fields are available as search 
criteria under the Advanced Search option, as described in “Using the 
Advanced Search feature” on page 40. 
2 Click Search.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
The Assigned Work table updates with the results of your search. 
3 Scroll through the Assigned Work table to find the specific record you want. 
Note: If the search returns a large number of records, use the Advanced 
Search feature to help you narrow the results. 
You can also search for another record from within an open record by using 
the standard BMC Remedy User search function. 
Using the Advanced Search feature 
If your search returns too broad a range of records, you can perform an 
advanced search to narrow the results. 
" To use the Advanced Search feature 
1 From the Incident Management console, click Advanced Search. 
The Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-7: Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box 
2 From the Keywords or Fields selection boxes, select the keywords or record 
fields on which you want to search. 
To insert operators (+, =, >,<, and so on), click the appropriate operator 
button. Do not forget to place literal values between quotation marks. For 
example, to search for an incident with a priority of “high,” you would 
construct the following search: 
'Priority' = "High" 
3 Click Select. 
The dialog box closes and you return to the main console. 
40 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Working with records ! 41 
4 Click Search. 
The search results table updates with the results of your search. 
Searching all records 
The following procedure describes how to search all incidents. Use this type 
of search when you are looking for an incident that is not associated with 
your ID or your group’s ID, or anytime you need to search all incidents. 
" To search all records 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Search Incident. 
A form appears that allows you to perform the search. 
The form is laid out in a similar way to the Incident form, and contains the 
same tabs and fields. You can use any of the tabs and fields in the form to 
specify your search criteria. 
2 Using the tabs and fields, build your search condition. 
To reduce the number of records found by the search, enter as much 
information into the form as you can. 
3 When you finish entering your search criteria, click Search. 
When the search finishes, the search results table lists all of the records that 
match the search criteria. 
4 Scroll through the table to find the specific record you want. 
5 When you find the record, open it in the Incident form by double-clicking it 
in the search results table. 
Printing records 
You can print a copy of a record to keep for filing purposes or to share with 
someone who does not have access to the application. 
Use this procedure to print a record. 
" To print a record 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Search Incident.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
2 Select the record you want to print. 
Note: If you already have the record open and want to print it, click Print at 
the bottom of the form to open the Business Objects Report Preview 
dialog box, then go to step 4. 
3 At the bottom of the console, from the Quick Actions list, select Print, then 
click Execute. 
The Business Objects Report Preview dialog box appears, allowing you to 
view the record before you print it. 
4 Click the Print icon on the menu bar at the top of the dialog box. 
When the print confirmation dialog box appears, click the Print icon to send 
the record to your local printer. 
5 Close the Business Objects dialog box. 
Modifying records 
After you generate a record, you can modify or update the information it 
contains. Use the following procedure to modify a record. 
" To modify a record 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the record that you want to 
modify. 
2 Click the tab that contains the information you want to update. 
3 Make the appropriate changes. 
4 Click Save. 
42 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Working with relationships ! 43 
Working with relationships 
By defining and maintaining relationships among records, you can create a 
more sophisticated overview of the connections and interdependencies 
among the current record and other service issues being tracked by the 
application. 
An incident can be related to any of the following record types: 
! Configuration item 
! Another incident 
! Solution database entry 
! Known error 
! Problem investigation 
If you have Asset Management and Change Management, an incident can 
also be related to the following record types: 
! CI unavailability 
! Infrastructure change 
Defining relationships 
Use the following procedure to define a relationship. 
" To define a relationship 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident from which you 
want to define a relationship. 
2 Click the Relationships tab. 
Figure 2-8: Relationships tab
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
3 From the Request Type list at the bottom of the Relationships tab, select the 
type of record to which you want to relate the current record. 
For example, to relate your incident to a configuration item, select Problem 
Investigation from the Request Type list. 
4 Click Search. 
A dialog box appears that allows you to perform a search. 
Figure 2-9: Example of Completed Relationship Search 
Note: The content of the dialog box depends on the type of record you chose 
in the Request Type list. 
5 Complete the search criteria tabs with the relevant information, then click 
Search. 
Try to supply as much information as possible in the search dialog box to 
reduce the overall number of records returned by the search. 
The matching results appear in a search results table. 
6 From the search results table, select the configuration item with which you 
want to create the relationship. 
44 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
7 From the Relationship Type list at the bottom of the search dialog box, select 
Working with relationships ! 45 
the type of relationship you want to create. 
8 Click Relate. 
An information message dialog box appears, displaying a confirmation 
message. 
9 Click OK to dismiss the dialog box. 
10 Click Close to close the search dialog box. 
The Relationships tab appears with the newly created relationship visible in 
the Relationships table. 
If there are events for the related item, the Current Events dialog box appears. 
This dialog box shows all current broadcasts that have been generated and 
related to the associated item. Broadcasts can be generated from other ITSM 
application modules, too. 
11 In the Current Events dialog box, select one of the following options: 
! Relate the current record to the originating record. 
! Link a record. 
! Relate the current record to the selected unavailability record. 
The lower table lists any current Unavailability recorded in an incident. 
To relate the current record to the origination record 
a Select the broadcast from the list. 
b Click Originating Record. 
To see additional details about the originating record, click Details. 
To link a record 
a Click Linked Incident. 
To relate the current record to the selected unavailability record 
a Click Relate. 
b To see additional details about the unavailability, click View CI 
Unavailability. 
c To see information about the record that generated the unavailability, 
click Details.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
An administrator can disable Current Events functionality in the Configure 
Incident Rules form. See the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 
Configuration Guide for information about how to do this. 
Copying relationships 
When you define a relationship between the current record and another 
record, the other record might also have one or more records related to it. 
Using the Copy Related Relationships form, which you open from the 
Relationships tab, you can look at the related record’s other relationships. If 
you determine that any of these other relationships should be related to the 
current record, you can define the relationship from this form. 
By doing this, you can more thoroughly document all of the record 
relationships. 
Note: You cannot use this procedure to copy related CIs. 
" To copy relationships 
1 From the Incident Management console, open an incident. 
2 Click the Relationships tab. 
3 From the Relationships table, select a record related to the current incident. 
4 From the Quick Actions list, select Get Related Relationships, then click 
Execute. 
The Copy Related Relationships dialog box appears. This dialog box contains 
a table of all other records related to the record you selected in step 3. 
5 From the table of related records, select the other record that you want to 
relate to the current record. 
Note: To see the details of the other record, select it, then click View. A form 
appears with detailed information about the selected record. Use this 
feature to help you determine whether you want to relate the other record 
to the current record. 
6 Click inside the Relationship Type field. 
A list of relationship types appears. 
46 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Note: The contents of the Relationship Type list depends on the type of 
record you are trying to create the relationship with. 
7 Select the type of relationship you want to create, then click Select. 
A note appears confirming the relationship creation. Click OK to dismiss the 
note. 
Working with relationships ! 47 
8 Close the Copy Related Relationships form. 
The newly created relationship appears in the Relationships table. 
Indicating impacted areas 
The Impacted Areas dialog box gives you a place to show the region, site, 
location, and so on, that are affected by the content of the record. Use the 
following procedure to indicate the impacted areas. 
" To indicate an impacted area 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident for which you 
want to indicate an impacted area. 
2 In the navigation pane, choose Advanced Functions > Impacted Areas. 
The Impacted Areas dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-10: Impacted Areas dialog box
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
3 Select items from the various lists that help to describe the impacted area 
appropriate for the incident you are working on, for example, Company, 
Region, and so on. 
Note: Required fields are marked with an asterisk. 
4 Click Add. 
You can add as many impacted areas as necessary. You can also delete areas 
that you have previously chosen in this dialog box. 
5 When you are finished indicating the impacted areas, click Close. 
Modifying relationships 
After you define a relationship, you change the relationship type and update 
the relationship description. Use the following procedure to modify the 
relationship. 
" To modify a relationship 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident that has the 
relationship you want to modify. 
2 Click the Relationships tab. 
3 From the Relationships table, select the relationship you want to modify. 
4 From the Quick Actions list, select Modify Relationship Type, then click 
Execute. 
The Modify Relationship dialog box appears. 
48 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Working with relationships ! 49 
Figure 2-11: Modify Relationship dialog box 
5 Enter the new relationship details according to the on-screen instructions. 
6 Click Save to save your changes. 
Performing quick actions on a relationship 
You can perform many other actions on a relationship. For a list of these 
actions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2. 
" To perform a quick action 
1 From the Incident Management console, open an incident. 
2 Click the Relationships tab. 
3 From the Relationships table, select the relationship entry for which you 
want to perform the action. 
4 From the Quick Actions list, select the action you want to perform, such as 
Get Impacted Areas.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
The following table lists available quick actions for any related item. 
Table 2-1: Effects of general relationship actions 
Relationship action Effect 
Get Related Relationships Copies the relationships of the selected 
record to the current incident’s 
relationships. 
Modify Relationship Type Prompts you to modify the relationship 
type, as described in “Modifying 
relationships” on page 48. 
Additional quick actions are available when you select a related configuration 
item, as indicated in the following table. 
Table 2-2: Effects of relationship actions for related CIs 
Relationship action Effect 
CI Relationship Viewer Opens a graphical relationship viewer that 
Create New CI Unavailability If Asset Management is installed, you can 
Get CI Impact/Urgency Copies the impact and urgency of the 
Get CI Product Categorization Copies the product categorization from 
Get CI Resolution Product Cat. Copies the product categorization from 
Get Impacted Areas If Asset Management is installed, prompts 
5 Click Execute. 
shows a selected CI’s relationship with 
other records. 
create CI unavailability for the selected CI. 
selected CI. 
the selected CI to the classification of the 
current incident. 
the selected CI to the resolution of the 
current incident. 
you to select impacted areas, as defined in 
the selected CI, into the current incident’s 
impacted areas. 
50 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Adding work information ! 51 
Removing relationships 
Use the following procedure to remove a relationship. 
" To remove a relationship 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident that contains the 
relationship you want to remove. 
2 Click the Relationships tab. 
3 In the Relationships table, select the relationship you want to remove. 
4 Click Remove. Click Yes when the application prompts you to confirm the 
removal. 
The application refreshes the Relationships tab. 
Adding work information 
Work Info is a new feature that replaces the Notes and Notes log fields from 
ITSM 6.0. You access this feature from the Work Info tab of the current 
record. 
Use this feature to add work information regarding activities performed on 
the current record. For example, you might want to add work information 
about the following activities: 
! General Information—Notes about the record; for example, you might 
want to add a note that a particular CI was deployed, and include the date. 
! Vendor communication—Notes about communication with a vendor, 
such as a bulletin received from a vendor. 
These are just some of the options available from the Work Info Type list on 
the Work Info tab. 
" To add work information 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident that you want to 
add the work information to. 
2 Click the Work Info tab.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 2-12: Work Info tab 
3 From the Work Info Type list, select the type of work information you want 
to add. 
4 From the Source list, select the source of this information. 
Information sources can include, for example, email, phone, or the Web. 
5 Enter the details of your work information record in the Summary and 
Details fields. 
6 To add an attachment to the record, right-click in the attachment table and 
select Add from the menu that appears. 
7 From the Locked list, select Yes or No to lock the log. 
Important: If you select Yes, you cannot modify the work log after you save it. 
8 From the View Access list, select Internal or Public. 
! Internal—If you want users within your organization to see the entry. 
! Public—If you want everyone with access to the application to see the 
entry, including requesters from the Requester console. 
9 Click Save. 
10 To see a report of selected work information entries, select one or more 
entries, and click Report. 
52 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Creating reminders ! 53 
Creating reminders 
Use reminders to create notes for yourself and others. You can send the 
reminders by email or by BMC Remedy Alert, and can specify when they will 
be sent. You can create generic reminders, or you can create reminders that 
are associated with a specific request. 
For example, you can send yourself a note about a specific incident to remind 
yourself to follow up on it. 
You can create and view reminders from either the Incident Management 
console or from within a specific incident. The location from which you 
create or view a reminder determines which reminders you see: 
! Incident Management console—You can view all reminders that you 
created. 
! Incident form—You can view all reminders associated with that incident. 
This includes reminders created by other users of Incident Management. 
" To create a reminder 
1 To open the Reminders dialog box, perform either of the following steps: 
! From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Reminders. 
! From the navigation pane in the Incident form, choose Functions > 
Reminders. 
Note: If you create a reminder from the application’s main console, the 
reminder is general in nature. If you open a record and create a reminder, 
the reminder is specific to the open record. 
2 Click the Create Reminder tab.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 2-13: Completed Create Reminder tab 
Note: If you are creating the reminder from the main console, skip the next 
step. 
3 To remove the link between the reminder you are creating and the open 
record, select, then delete the contents of the Link to Request-ID field. The 
Request-ID and Form fields are populated automatically by the application. 
The Request-ID field links the reminder to the open record. 
4 From the Notify list, select either Individual or Group, depending on 
whether you are sending the reminder to a single person, or a support group. 
5 In the Recipient field, type the name of the person or group to whom you 
want to send the reminder. 
If you type a person’s name and press ENTER, the application automatically 
populates the AR Login field. If the application discovers multiple matches 
with the name you entered, another dialog box appears that allows you to 
specify which of the matching names you want to receive the reminder. 
6 In the Time field, enter the date and time you want the application to send 
the reminder. 
You can type the information directly into the field, or you can click the 
button next to the field and select the date and time from the calendar that 
appears. By default, the Time field contains the current date and time. 
7 In the Subject field, enter information about the reminder. 
If you need more space to type the entry, click the Browse button next to the 
field. A larger text entry box appears. 
54 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
The information in this field appears in the subject line if the reminder is sent 
by email. 
Creating reminders ! 55 
8 In the Message field, type the reminder message text. 
If you need more space to type the entry, click the ellipsis button next to the 
field. A larger text entry box appears. 
9 Click Save. 
A confirmation message appears. 
10 Click Close to close the Reminders dialog box. 
The reminder is sent at the time you specified. 
Broadcasting messages 
This feature lets you send messages to your entire organization, selected 
groups within the organization, and to external customers as well. You can 
use this feature to send messages about work in progress, system status, 
planned work, and so on. You can also use this feature to view messages that 
were broadcast to you from other groups in your organization. 
Creating broadcast messages 
This section describes how to create a broadcast message using the 
New/Modify dialog box. To create a broadcast, you must have the functional 
role of Broadcast Submitter. See the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 
Configuration Guide for details. 
" To create a broadcast message 
1 You can open the New/Modify Broadcast dialog box from two locations, as 
follows: 
! From the Incident Management console, click Create, which appears 
below the Broadcast table. If you create a broadcast from the main 
console, it is not related to a specific record. 
! From the current record, in the navigation pane, choose Functions > 
Broadcast Incident. If you create a broadcast from an incident, a 
relationship is created between the broadcast and the incident.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 2-14: Completed New/Modify Broadcasts form 
2 Enter information in the required fields. 
Required fields appear in bold on the Broadcast Details tab. 
! Company—Select the company to which this broadcast pertains. Only 
users with access to this company will see the broadcast. If you select 
Global from the Company list, the broadcast is sent to everyone. 
The Company field is mandatory. If you complete the other location 
fields, however, you can indicate a very specific part of the company. For 
example, you can specify the site, organization, or department. 
! Subject—A short description of what the broadcast is about. 
! Broadcast Message—The text of your message. 
! Broadcast Type—Select a broadcast type from the list. 
! Broadcast Start Date and Broadcast End Date—To start the broadcast 
now, click in the Broadcast Start Date field, and press ENTER. To select a 
date from the calendar, click the Browse button next to the field, then use 
the calendar that appears to select the date on which the broadcast is to 
start and the date on which you want it to end. You can also specify times 
of the day using the Time feature at the bottom of the calendar. 
56 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
! Broadcast Originated From—This field is completed by the system. The 
contents depend on where you are creating the broadcast. If you broadcast 
from an incident, this is set to Incident. 
! Broadcast Originated From ID—This field is populated by the system, 
but only when you create a broadcast from within a record. If you create a 
broadcast from the main console, the field appears disabled. 
! View Access—Select Internal if you want the broadcast visible only to 
members of your organization. Select Public if you also want the broadcast 
visible from the Requester console. 
! Notify—Select Yes if you want a broadcast notification automatically sent 
to an individual or group. 
If you select Yes, an Email button and the Notify Support area appears. 
! Use the Manual Email button to manually send an email about the 
broadcast to a person or group. When the Email System form appears, 
enter the recipient’s email address in the Internet Email field, then click 
Send Email Now. 
! Use the Notify Support area to indicate the group you want to notify of 
the broadcast. You must complete all three fields, Support Company, 
Support Organization, and Support Group. The notification is sent at 
the time and on the date specified in the Broadcast Start Date field. 
! Priority—Select a priority level for the broadcast. The choices are Low, 
Creating reminders ! 57 
Medium, and High. 
3 To add an attachment to the broadcast message, right-click inside the table 
and choose Add from the menu that appears. 
The Add Attachment dialog box appears. Use this to indicate the file you 
want to attach. Click Open to attach the indicated file. You are limited to one 
attachment for each broadcast. 
4 If you want members of another group to be able to modify the message, 
perform the following steps: 
a Click the Authoring Groups tab. 
b Click Manage Authoring Groups. 
The Authoring Group dialog box appears. 
c Indicate the group that you want to have authoring rights by selecting 
from the menus. Click Add when you are finished.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Note: The support group you belong to appears in the table by default. 
You can indicate another group, or click Close to dismiss the dialog box. 
5 Click Save to save the broadcast message and close the dialog box. 
Viewing broadcasts 
This section describes how to view broadcast messages. While viewing 
broadcasts, you can modify the message (if you belong to an authorized 
authoring group), create a new broadcast message, and under some 
circumstances (when viewing the message from the current record) relate the 
broadcast message to the current record. 
When viewing a broadcast from either the Incident Management console or 
the Incident form, you can create a new incident from the broadcast. If the 
broadcast was created from a problem investigation, CI (configuration item), 
CI unavailability, or another incident, the application asks whether you want 
to relate the new incident to the originating record. 
" To view broadcasts 
1 You can view broadcast messages from two locations, as follows: 
! From the Incident Management console, select the message you want to 
view from the Broadcast table, then click View. 
! From the current record, in the navigation pane, choose Quick Links > 
View Broadcasts. The View Broadcasts dialog box appears. Select the 
message you want to view from the broadcast messages table; the 
Broadcast Details tab displays the details of the selected broadcast. 
Note: When viewing broadcast messages from the current record, you are 
looking at all of the broadcast messages, not just the ones related to the 
current record. If the list contains a large number of messages, use the 
Broadcast Search Criteria tab to limit the number of messages. For 
information about how to do this, see “Limiting the number of messages” 
on page 59. 
2 To view another message, perform either of the following steps: 
58 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
! When viewing from the main console, close the View Broadcasts dialog 
box, select the broadcast message you want to view from the table, then 
click View. 
! When viewing from the current record, in the broadcast messages table, 
click the message you want to view. The message details appear. 
Creating or modifying a broadcast message 
To create or modify a broadcast message from the View Broadcasts dialog 
box, click either Create or Modify. Both actions open the New/Modify 
Broadcast dialog box. 
! If you are creating a new message, follow the instructions provided in 
Creating reminders ! 59 
“Creating broadcast messages” on page 55. 
! If you are modifying the message, edit the fields according to the changes 
you want to make. Click Save when you finish making your changes. 
Limiting the number of messages 
When viewing broadcast messages from the current record, you can limit the 
number of messages that appear in the Broadcast table by opening the 
Broadcast Search Criteria tab and defining a set of criteria that filters out 
messages that do not match. 
" To limit the number of messages 
1 From the Incident Management console, open an incident. 
2 Click the Broadcast Search Criteria tab. 
This tab contains search fields where you can specify criteria to reduce the 
number of broadcast messages displayed in the table. 
3 Complete the fields in the tab. 
To return the smallest number of broadcast messages, complete as many of 
the fields as possible. 
4 When you finish specifying the search criteria, click Search.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Sending pages and email messages 
Incident Management gives you two methods of sending messages to either 
individuals or organizations: 
! Pages 
! Email 
This section describes how to send both types of messages manually. 
Note: Notification messages to individuals, based on incident assignments 
and other events, can be sent by the application as pages or emails. For 
information about configuring notification to be sent as pager or email 
messages, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration 
Guide. 
Paging a person or on-call group 
You can page individuals or the on-call member of a group about the current 
record using the Incident Management Paging System feature. 
" To page a person or an on-call group 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident from which you 
want to send the page. 
2 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Paging System. 
The Paging System dialog box appears. 
60 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Sending pages and email messages ! 61 
Figure 2-15: Paging System dialog box 
3 Select either: 
! Page By Person—To page an individual. 
! Page By On-Call Group—To page the on-call member of a specified 
group. 
4 Select the recipient. 
To do this, complete the fields in the Search Criteria area, then click Search. 
When the search finishes, click the recipient’s name in the search results 
table, then click Select. 
If you are sending a page to a person (instead of an on-call group) and need 
help determining the correct person, you can see more information about an 
individual by selecting his or her name from the list, then clicking View. This 
opens the People form, which contains detailed information about the 
recipient. 
5 Complete the fields in the Paging Information area, as follows, then click 
Send Page Now.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
! Pager Service Provider—Select the recipient’s pager service provider from 
the list. 
If you are sending a page to a person, you can find this information by 
selecting the person’s name from the search results list, then clicking View 
(as described in step 4). When the People form appears, click the 
Notifications tab and look for the Pager Service Provider field. 
Note: To learn more about the service provider, click the button with the 
globe icon beside the field to open a link that takes you to the service 
provider’s website. This link is configured by your administrator, as 
described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration 
Guide. 
! Pager Type—The application populates this field automatically, using 
information about the recipient already in the application. 
! Pager Number—The application auto-populates this field with the 
pager’s telephone number, when possible. If the pager number is 
unavailable to the application, you must enter the pager number 
manually. See Manual Pager Number. 
! Pager Email—If the pager has an email address, type it here. If you are 
sending the page to a person, this information is available on the 
Notifications tab, as described previously. 
! Manual Pager Number—If the pager’s telephone number is not available 
automatically from the paging system, type the pager’s telephone number 
here. 
! Alphanumeric Pager Message or Numeric Pager Message—Type your 
message in this field. Be aware that only one of these fields is enabled, 
depending on the type of pager the recipient carries. 
62 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Sending pages and email messages ! 63 
Sending email 
You can send messages about the current record using the Incident 
Management Email System. 
You can use this function to send email to any valid email address. This might 
include an SMS recipient or wireless PDA user, if you can send email to the 
device. 
" To send an email message 
1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident from which you 
want to send an email message. 
2 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Email System. 
The Email System dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-16: Completed Email System dialog box
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
3 Indicate the recipient by selecting one of the following options: 
! Current Contact—When you open the Email System form, if there is a 
current contact assigned to the record, the contact’s name with contact 
information appears in the table and is the default recipient. 
! Current Assignee—To select the current assignee, click Select Current 
Assignee. The current assignee’s name with contact information appears 
in the table. 
4 To select another recipient, perform the following steps: 
a Complete the fields in the People Search Criteria area. 
b Click Search. 
c When the search finishes, select the recipient’s name in the search results 
table. 
If you need help determining the correct name in the list, you can see more 
information about an individual by selecting their name from the list, then 
clicking View. This opens the People form, which contains detailed 
information about the recipient. 
5 Complete the email information fields. See the list that follows for a 
description of the fields. 
! Internet Email—This displays the recipient’s email address. 
When you select the email recipient, as described in steps 3 and 4, the 
internet email address updates from the people record. 
! Email Subject Line—By default, the subject line contains the incident ID 
number, to which you can append text or over-type. 
! Email Message Body—You type the message text here. A series of buttons, 
to the right of the Email Message Body field, lets you automatically insert 
text from the record into the message text; these buttons let you insert the 
following values: 
! Status 
! Summary 
! Details 
! Resolution 
64 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Note: If one or more of these buttons appear disabled, it means the 
corresponding field in the record contains no information. 
! Email Attachment—You can attach a file to the email message (you are 
limited to just one attachment). To do this, right-click inside the Email 
Attachment table, then click Add. The Add Attachment dialog box 
appears. Navigate to, and then select, the file you want to attach. Click 
Open. Details of the attached file appear in the table. 
Working with reports ! 65 
6 Click Send Email Now. 
Working with reports 
Incident Management provides a variety of predefined reports to give you 
quick and easy access to information the application. You use the Report 
console to generate these reports. If the predefined reports return more 
information than you need, you can manage the scope of the report using 
qualifications. For information about using qualifications, see “Using 
qualifications to generate a report” on page 67. 
Important: If you use Crystal Reports software to modify the prepared 
reports supplied with Incident Management, Customer Support can 
provide only limited assistance if you have a reporting problem. In 
addition, there is no guarantee that problems resulting from these 
modifications can be solved. The standard reports included with Incident 
Management are designed to be used without modification. 
Generating a report 
Use this procedure to generate a standard report without using qualifications 
(for information about generating reports with qualifications, see “Using 
qualifications to generate a report” on page 67). 
" To generate a report 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Reports. 
The Report console appears.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 2-17: Report console 
2 From the Report Name list, select the report you want to generate. 
Report Description 
Incidents by Activity Time This report lists all open incidents and 
3 If you select a report that requires a date range, the date range field appears. 
Select a start date and end date for the report. 
66 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications 
the amount of time since the reported 
date. 
Open Incident Volume by Assignee This bar chart displays the number of 
open incidents for each assignee. 
Resolved and Closed Incident Volume 
by Assignee 
This bar chart displays the number of 
resolved and closed incidents for each 
assignee. 
Group Assignment to Incidents This report lists incidents and their 
assigned support groups for a 
specified date range. 
Change Induced Incidents This report lists incidents that were 
caused by changes. 
Note: This report is available only if 
Change Management is installed.
User’s Guide 
4 From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: 
! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. 
! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup 
Working with reports ! 67 
dialog box. 
! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 
5 Click Run Report. 
Using qualifications to generate a report 
You can manage the scope of a report by adding qualifications to the criteria 
used by the report engine to generate the report content. You can tell the 
report to search only certain specified fields for particular values, or build 
advanced qualifications using field names, keywords, and operators. By 
saving the qualifications, you can rerun the qualified report without having 
to re-specify the qualifications. 
The following procedure describes how to create basic report qualifications 
from the Define Report Qualification area of the Report console. To create a 
report using advanced qualifications, see “Using advanced qualifications to 
generate a report” on page 69. 
" To use qualifications to generate a report 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Reports. 
The Report console appears.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 2-18: Report console 
2 From the Report Name list, select the name of the report you want to 
generate. 
3 In the Define Report Qualification area, create your qualifications from the 
lists. 
For example, to create the qualification 
“Cost Center = 001” 
select “Cost Center” from the list in the left column, select “=” from the 
operand list (middle column), then type “001” in the right column. 
You can use all five rows in the area to define qualifications. 
4 To save the qualification, click Save Qualification. 
You are prompted to name the qualification. 
Note: By saving the qualification, you can rerun this report without defining 
the qualification again. See “Generating a report using saved 
qualifications” on page 70. 
5 In the Qualification Name field, enter a name for your qualification, and 
click OK. 
A message appears stating that your qualification is saved. 
6 Click OK. 
68 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
Working with reports ! 69 
The Report console reappears. 
7 From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: 
! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. 
! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup 
dialog box. 
! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 
8 Click Run Report. 
Using advanced qualifications to generate a report 
The following procedure describes how to generate a report using advanced 
qualifications. 
" To generate a report using advanced qualifications 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Reports. 
The Report console appears. 
2 From the Report Name list, select the name of the report you want to 
generate. 
3 Click Advanced Qualification. 
The Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-19: Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box 
4 Using the buttons in the qualification builder, construct your qualification. 
5 Click Save. 
The Report console reappears.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Note: By saving the qualification, you can rerun this report without defining 
the qualification again. See “Generating a report using saved 
qualifications” on page 70. 
6 From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: 
! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. 
! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup 
dialog box. 
! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 
7 Click Run Report. 
Generating a report using saved qualifications 
You can generate a report using qualifications that you created and saved 
previously. 
" To generate a report using a saved qualification 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Reports. 
The Report console appears. 
2 Click Select Saved Qualification. 
The Saved Qualifications dialog box appears. 
Figure 2-20: Saved Qualifications dialog box 
3 Select the qualification from the table, and click Return Selected. 
The Report console reappears. 
70 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
User’s Guide 
4 From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: 
! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. 
! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup 
Working with reports ! 71 
dialog box. 
! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 
5 Click Run Report.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
72 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
Chapter 3 Working with the Requester 
Working with the Requester console ! 73 
console 
The Requester console serves as the front end for the BMC Remedy Change 
Management and BMC Remedy Incident Management applications. It 
provides an easy, user-friendly interface that allows users to quickly submit 
requests for change or incidents to IT through the two back-end applications. 
The following topics are provided: 
! Requester role (page 74) 
! Service Request Management users (page 74) 
! Understanding the Requester console (page 76) 
! Working with service requests (page 80) 
! Working with service requests as the Request Master (page 91) 
! Service Request form (page 98) 
! Working with the Solution database (page 101) 
! Viewing broadcast messages (page 102)
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Requester role 
Requesters are usually employees who need assistance from the IT support 
staff. The requester is typically an employee in the organization who must 
have a change implemented or an incident resolved. Any member of your 
organization can be a requester. 
However, the user might not be an employee. Non-employees can also be 
requesters, since non-registered users can also submit a service request. 
Traditionally, after a requester made a telephone call to a central help desk, a 
support staff member logged the request. The BMC Remedy Incident 
Management and BMC Remedy Change Management applications provide 
user self-provisioning. Using the Requester console, requesters can submit, 
track, and (in some cases) resolve their own requests, and, as a result, 
improve the overall efficiency. Out of the box, the Change Management and 
Incident Management applications are preconfigured to work with the 
Requester console. However, the Requester console is not enabled if your 
organization turns off this option. 
The Requester console is the primary interface from where requesters can 
create and view their requests. From the Requester console, you can create a 
request and submit it to the back-end application, view previously created 
requests, and respond to a survey form after the request has been resolved. 
Service Request Management users 
There are currently three types of user permissions for accessing the 
Requester console to submit service requests: 
! Request Master—This user is responsible for troubleshooting service 
requests. The request master can view all the requests submitted by other 
users and open the Service Request form directly to view the details of a 
record. This user is more of an administrator, than a support user. 
! Registered User—This user has a record in the People form, and the user’s 
AR login information is in the Login/Access Details tab of the People form 
or in the AR System User form. 
! Unknown User—All other users are considered to be unknown users even 
if the user has a record in the People form. If a user’s login information 
does not exist in the People record, then the user is considered a unknown 
user. 
74 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Important: For unknown users who do not have an AR System login to be 
able to access the Requester console, the AR System server option “Allow 
Guest User” option must be turned on. The Allow Guest User option is 
available only when the server is set to single-tenancy mode. Also the 
AR Submitter locked mode must be enabled for users with read-only 
license to respond to surveys. The Incident Management and Change 
Management applications must also set up a default People record with a 
valid AR System login to be used for unknown users. For more 
information, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 
Configuration Guide. 
If a user meets any of the following conditions, the user type is “unknown 
user”: 
! The user has entries in the People form and in the AR System User form, 
but does not have an AR System Login ID in the People form. 
! The user has an entry in the People form, but has neither an entry in the 
AR System User form nor an AR System Login ID in the People form. This 
type of user is also an AR System Guest User. 
! The user does not have an entry in the People form, but has an entry in the 
Service Request Management users ! 75 
AR System User form. 
! The user does not have an entry in the People form or in the AR System 
User form. This type of user is also an AR System Guest User. 
Some other factors that control allowing unknown users access to the 
Requester console follow: 
! Unknown users are not allowed access if the multi-tenancy option is 
turned on. Multi-tenancy provides restricted access of data from different 
companies or business units. This feature makes it possible to host 
multiple companies and their data on a single server. Multi-tenancy is 
limited to the company level. Configuration can differ on a per-company 
basis. Multi-tenancy from the user’s perspective is accessed by selecting 
the appropriate company from the list next to the Company field. 
The Tenancy Mode has to be set by a user with administrator and general 
access permissions on the System Settings form. For more information 
about ITSM foundation settings, see the BMC Remedy IT Service 
Management 7.0 Configuration Guide.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
! In addition to setting the Tenancy Mode to Single-Tenancy, the Allow 
Unknown Users option must be set to Yes and the login information 
added. This is set by a user with Request Config permissions on the 
Application Settings form. 
! Unknown users are only allowed within the Requester console framework, 
which means that if the Change or Incident form is directly accessed, it 
does not allow unknown users. 
Understanding the Requester console 
The Requester console serves as the front end to the Change Management 
and Incident Management applications. 
Figure 3-1: Requester console 
The console is the entry point for users to create, view, update, or cancel their 
own service requests. For more information about the Requester console, see 
the following topics: 
! Opening the Requester console (page 77) 
! Functional areas and tasks (page 78) 
76 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Understanding the Requester console ! 77 
Opening the Requester console 
You can view the Requester console through the BMC Remedy User client or 
through a browser. See the following instructions for information about 
opening the Requester console. 
" To open the Requester console from BMC Remedy User 
1 Log in to BMC Remedy User using your AR System Login information. 
Unknown or guest users need to log in using the default set up by their 
company. 
2 From the IT Home page, click Requester console. 
The Requester console appears. 
3 Create, view, modify, print, or cancel a request as needed. 
For more information, see “Working with service requests” on page 80. 
" Using a browser to open the Requester console 
1 To open the Requester console from a browser, type the following URL in to 
your browser’s address bar: 
http://<web_server>:<port>/arsys/apps/<arsystem_server>/Home Page 
where: 
<web_server> is the fully qualified name of the BMC Remedy Mid Tier 
system, specified in the format server_name.company.com. 
<port> is an optional port number, which is needed if the web server is not 
on the default port (port 80). 
<arsystem_server> is the name of your BMC Remedy AR System server. 
For a list of supported browsers, see the compatibility matrix at: 
http://supportweb.remedy.com/Rem/IssuesAndSolutions/ 
CompatibilityMatrix/index.jsp 
2 Enter your user name and password, then click Login. 
3 When the IT Home page opens, click the Requester Console link in the 
navigation pane.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Functional areas and tasks 
The Requester console has the following functional areas. 
Console Area Function 
View Requests Use the View Requests links to filter the requests in the 
Requests table. Requests can be sorted by the following 
options: 
! Open 
! All 
For more information, see “Filtering service requests” 
on page 83. 
General Functions Use the General Functions links to do the following 
actions: 
! Update the information in your requests, by creating a 
new work info entry. See “Modifying a service 
request” on page 85. 
! Search for requests by Request ID. See “Searching for 
service requests by Request ID” on page 86. 
! Save the console view. 
! Work on a survey. See “Completing surveys” on 
page 88. 
Request Errors If you have Request Master permissions, the Request 
Errors function appears in the navigation pane. 
For more information, see “Viewing service requests 
with errors” on page 90. 
Refresh button Refreshes the Broadcasts and My Requests tables. 
Click Refresh to refresh the data in the tables. 
Broadcasts Displays broadcasts or bulletin board messages. The 
View button displays the selected broadcast in a dialog 
box, from where you can view details about the 
broadcast. 
Note: No internal broadcast messages appear in the 
Requester console. 
For more information, see “Viewing broadcast 
messages” on page 102. 
78 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Understanding the Requester console ! 79 
Console Area Function 
Create a New Request 
button 
Click this button to display the New Request wizard, 
from where you can create a new service request. 
For more information, see “Creating a service request” 
on page 80. 
My Requests Displays the requests submitted by the logged in user. 
When performing Request form searches, only 
administrators and users who have Request Master 
permissions can view other users’ submitted requests. 
Request Details Displays details about the request that is selected from 
the My Requests table. 
View button Displays the record that is selected from the My Requests 
table. 
For more information, see “Viewing a service request 
record” on page 84. 
Print button Prints the record that is selected from the My Requests 
table. 
For more information, see “Printing a service request” 
on page 86 
Cancel button Cancels the service request that is selected from the My 
Requests table. 
For more information, see “Canceling a service request” 
on page 87. 
Reopen button Lets you reopen requests that are in Completed or 
Rejected state. 
For more information, see “Reopening a service request” 
on page 87. 
Close button Closes the console window.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Working with service requests 
The following topics are provided: 
! “Creating a service request” on page 80 
! “Filtering service requests” on page 83 
! “Viewing a service request record” on page 84 
! “Modifying a service request” on page 85 
! “Printing a service request” on page 86 
! “Canceling a service request” on page 87 
! “Reopening a service request” on page 87 
! “Completing surveys” on page 88 
Creating a service request 
You can create service requests from the New Request wizard, which is the 
recommended way to create a service request. The New Request wizard is a 
simplified user interface for submitting your service requests. You can also 
create service requests from the Change and Incident forms. 
A user with Request Master permissions can directly open the SRM:Request 
form from the File > Open > Object List menu to view service requests. 
However, service requests cannot be created from the SRM:Service Request 
form. 
For more information about the Service Request form and the role of the 
Request Master, see “Working with service requests as the Request Master” 
on page 91. 
" To create a service request 
1 From the Requester console, click Create a New Request. 
The New Request wizard appears. 
80 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Working with service requests ! 81 
Figure 3-2: New Request wizard 
Pay careful attention to the following items for the Requester section: 
! If you are a registered user, the fields in the Requester section are 
populated from the user’s People record. All the fields are read-only, 
except the Phone and Email fields, which are editable. 
! If you are an unknown user, the First Name and Last Name fields are 
pre-populated with their login information. The Company is pre-populated 
with the single-tenancy company name. Unknown users 
must enter information in the Phone and Email. 
2 Complete the required fields: 
Note: Required field names are in bold with an asterisk. You must enter 
information in the required fields to be able to successfully submit the 
request. 
a Select a definition from the Summary list that best describes your issue 
from the Summary list.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
If the list does not list the specific request you want to log, enter a 
summary of the request manually in the Summary field. 
Note: Manually entering a summary or “ad hoc request” always creates an 
incident request if Incident Management is installed. If Incident 
Management is not installed, a change request is created. 
If you select a summary definition that is an incident, then related solution 
database entries appear in the Possible Solutions table, based on the 
categorization of the summary. Possible solutions do not appear for 
manually entered summaries. 
Important: The Possible Solutions table appears only if the Problem 
Management application is installed. 
If a matching solution appears and you choose to use this solution, the 
solution entry is related your request and the request is resolved 
automatically. See “Working with the Solution database” on page 101. 
b Select an Urgency level for your request from the list. 
c If you do not have a record in the People form, then the Company, First 
Name and Last Name fields might not be populated, but you must 
complete them. 
3 (Optional) Click Add Attachment to enter request work information. 
You can include a note or an attachment. For more information about the 
Request Work Info dialog box, see “Modifying a service request” on page 85. 
4 Complete the optional fields: 
! Date Required—Enter a date by when you require that this request be 
completed. 
! Phone—Enter or edit your phone number. 
! Email—Enter or edit your email address. 
Note: Unknown users must enter information in the Phone or Email fields 
5 Click Save to save the request. 
82 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
The New Request wizard closes, and the request you just saved appears in the 
My Requests table. 
Service request states 
For changes and incidents, the My Request table console lists the status of its 
underlying service request. Users are notified whenever a service request 
undergoes a status change, for example, when a service request is moved 
from In Progress to Completed after an incident or a change request reaches 
the Completed state. 
The notification method is always by email. 
Working with service requests ! 83 
Filtering service requests 
When registered and unknown users access the Requester console, they can 
see a list of only their own service requests. 
" To filter your service requests 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 Filter your service requests by clicking the appropriate link from the View 
Requests section, located on the left navigation pane of the Requester 
console. 
The options are: 
! Open—Displays all your open requests. 
This is the default view. You can choose to change the default view by 
selecting another sort option, then clicking Save As Default View. 
! All—Displays all your requests. 
The My Requests table displays the requests that fall under the selected status.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Viewing a service request record 
From the Requester console, you can view your submitted service requests. 
The My Requests table displays only the requests that the logged in user has 
submitted. Change requests are prefixed with CRQ and Incident requests are 
prefixed by INC. 
" To view a service request record 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 If necessary, sort the service requests to display the ones that you want to 
view, as described in “Filtering service requests” on page 83. 
3 From the My Requests table, select the service request record that you want 
to view. 
4 View some details of the record in the Request Details section of the console. 
Figure 3-3: Request Details 
5 Click View to display the record. 
! To update the service request, see “Modifying a service request” on 
page 85. 
! To print the service request record, see “Printing a service request” on 
page 86. 
! To cancel a submitted service request, see “Canceling a service request” on 
page 87. 
6 Click Close. 
1. Select a record. 
2. View some details in the 
Request Details section. 
3. Click View to display the 
record in the Request 
Details window. 
84 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Working with service requests ! 85 
Modifying a service request 
There are limited updates you can make to your service request after you 
have submitted it. You can make only the following changes: 
! Cancel the request—See “Canceling a service request” on page 87. 
! Update the work information—See “To update the work information of 
a service request” on page 85. 
! Reopen the request—You can reopen a service request, but only when it is 
advanced to a certain state. For information, see “Reopening a service 
request” on page 87. 
" To update the work information of a service request 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 From the list of your requests in the My Requests table, select the record that 
you want to modify. 
3 Perform one of the following actions: 
! Click the Add Work Info link from the Console Functions section on the 
left navigation pane. 
! Click View, click the Work Info tab, and then click Add Work Info. 
The Request Work Info dialog box appears. 
Figure 3-4: Request Work Info dialog box 
4 Enter a summary of the work log in the Summary field.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
5 Optionally, you can do the following steps: 
a Enter additional information in the Notes field. 
b Add an attachment. You are limited to one attachment for each work 
information entry. If you need to add multiple attachments, you can add 
multiple work information entries. 
6 Click Save. 
Searching for service requests by Request ID 
You can quickly search for a service request by its Request ID. 
" To search by Request ID 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 Click Search by Request ID. 
3 Enter the complete Request ID or the numeric part of the ID. 
The matching request appears in the My Requests table. 
Printing a service request 
To enable the print functionality, be sure to follow steps 1 through 4. 
" To print a service request 
1 Log in to BMC Remedy User with your server name in the Preference Server 
field. 
2 Choose Tools > Options. 
The Options dialog box appears. 
3 Click the Advanced tab. 
4 Make sure that ODBC Use Underscores is checked. 
5 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
6 Select the record you want to print from the My Requests table. 
7 Click Print. 
86 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
The report appears in the Report Preview window. 
8 Review the report, and then click the Print icon on the toolbar. 
Working with service requests ! 87 
Canceling a service request 
You can only cancel a service request that is open. You cannot reopen a 
canceled service request until it reaches the Completed or Rejected state. 
" To cancel a service request 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 If necessary, sort the requests to show all Open requests, as described in 
“Filtering service requests” on page 83. 
3 Select the service request record that you want to cancel. 
4 Click Cancel. 
You are prompted if you are sure you want to cancel to request. 
5 Click Yes. 
6 Refresh the My Requests table, if necessary, to view the status of all your 
service requests. 
Reopening a service request 
You can only reopen service requests that are in the Completed or Rejected 
state. 
" To reopen a request 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 If necessary, sort the requests to show all Open requests, as described in 
“Filtering service requests” on page 83. 
3 Select the service request record that you want to reopen. 
Note: The Cancel button changes to Reopen when you select a completed or 
rejected record.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 3-5: Reopening a record 
4 Click Reopen. 
Note: You can only reopen records that are in Completed or Rejected state. 
The following note appears: The selected request has been reopened. 
5 Click OK to dismiss the note. 
The request now appears as In Progress or Open. The status shown depends 
on whether the request is a change or an incident 
1. To reopen a 
canceled record, select 
the record. 
2. Click Reopen. 
Completing surveys 
You will be notified through email to respond to a survey after your service 
request is marked Completed. Each service request generates a separate 
survey. 
Note: Surveys must be set up for your company and the option must be 
turned on. If surveys are not set up and the survey option is not turned on, 
no surveys are generated. 
" To complete a survey 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 Click View Survey. 
88 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Working with service requests ! 89 
The Survey dialog box appears. 
Figure 3-6: Survey dialog box 
3 Select a survey, and then click Respond. 
4 Type your responses to the questions. 
Figure 3-7: Requester survey 
5 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Viewing service requests with errors 
If you have Command Event Master and Request Master permissions, you 
can view which service requests contain errors, for example, if there is a 
problem with a back-end application. 
" To view requests with errors 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 From the navigation pane, choose Request Errors > View Requests with 
Errors. 
The Service Request form opens. It displays those service requests that 
contain errors of various types. 
Figure 3-8: Service Request form—Entries containing errors 
3 To view the error status and its possible source, click the Change/Incident 
Data tab. 
4 If you have Command Event Master permissions, click Reset Error to restart 
the service request. 
90 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Users can now continue to work on the service request. 
5 If you have Command Event Master permissions, click View Events to review 
the event log and troubleshoot the service request. 
For more information, see “Viewing the event log and troubleshooting” on 
page 97. 
Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 91 
6 Save any changes. 
Working with service requests as the Request Master 
Only users with Request Master permissions can access the Service Request 
form directly. All other users need to use the New Request wizard to create 
service requests. 
The Service Request form is accessed by the Request Master users to 
troubleshoot system errors. See “Opening a service request record” on 
page 92. For information about the Service Request form, see “Service 
Request form” on page 98. 
Request Masters can do the following actions with the Service Request form: 
! Add Work Info entries for service requests—See “To view or add work 
information” on page 94. 
! Use the accelerator links on the navigation pane to reopen a request, 
cancel a request, and so on—See “Canceling a service request” on page 87 
and “Reopening a service request” on page 87. 
! View the event log if a service request event has failed or is in error state, 
and either retry the event or ignore the event—See “To view the event log” 
on page 97. 
Note: The Request Master user must have Request Master permissions. 
Request Masters, however, cannot directly update any other form fields. 
Only users with AR System Administrator permissions are allowed to delete 
service request records. 
Important: Delete service requests with caution. They cannot be recovered.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Opening a service request record 
Note: Only Request Masters can directly access the Service Request form. 
This user needs Request Master and Command Event Master permissions. 
Figure 3-9: Service Requests form 
Note: Request Masters can view records that they have access to, granted by 
company access in the People form. Request Masters with unrestricted 
access (that is, they have access to all companies) can view all service 
requests, as can the AR System administrator. 
" To open a service request record 
1 Log in to the AR System. 
2 Choose File > Open > Object List. 
The Object List dialog box appears. 
3 Click the Find tab. 
4 Enter Service Request in the Search what keywords? field, and then click 
Find. 
92 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
5 Select the service request entry, and click Search. 
Note: New service requests are created from the Service Request console, 
using the New Request wizard. If you try to select the service request entry 
and click New, you get an error message. 
The Service Requests form appears in Search mode. For more information 
about the service request form, see “Service Request form” on page 98. 
6 Enter search criteria, and then click Search. 
7 Select the service request record you want to view or troubleshoot from the 
Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 93 
search results. 
8 Follow these steps as needed: 
! “Reopening a service request” on page 93 
! “Viewing or adding work information” on page 94 
! “Viewing the event log and troubleshooting” on page 97 
9 Click Save. 
Reopening a service request 
You can reopen a completed or rejected service request. You can cancel a 
Pending, In Progress, or Staged request. 
" To reopen or cancel a request 
1 Complete steps 1 through 7 from the procedure “To open a service request 
record” on page 92. 
2 On the appropriate record, take the appropriate action: 
! Click Reopen Request if you need to reopen a completed or rejected 
request. 
! Click Cancel Request if you need to cancel a request. 
Note: The appropriate action link is enabled, depending on the state of the 
service request.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
The service request shown has a Status of Completed, so the Reopen Request 
link is enabled. 
Figure 3-10: Service Request form—Completed Status 
Reopen Request action is enabled when Status is set to Completed. 
3 Click OK to dismiss the confirmation message. 
! If you clicked Reopen Request, the Status changes to New, Staged, or In 
Progress. 
! If you clicked Cancel Request, the Status changes to Canceled. 
4 Click Save to save your changes. 
Viewing or adding work information 
You can quickly add to the Work Info dialog box of an existing service 
request by clicking View Work Info or Add Work Info from the left 
navigation pane. 
" To view or add work information 
1 Do steps 1 through 7 from the procedure “To open a service request record” 
on page 92. 
2 Click the appropriate link: 
! View Work Info—Displays the Request Work Info dialog box and existing 
work information. Select the entry in the History table that you want to 
view, and view its details. (The View Work Info link is enabled only if there 
is existing information for the selected record.) 
94 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Figure 3-11: Request Work Info dialog box 
! Add Work Info—Displays the Request Work Info dialog box and allows 
you to add information. 
See “Adding or viewing work information from a service request” on 
page 95. 
3 Click Save to save your changes. 
Adding or viewing work information from a service 
request 
The Request Work Info dialog box has a different view when the Request 
Master opens it from the Service Request form than when the user accesses it 
from the Requester console. 
" To add or view work information from a service request 
1 Complete steps 1 and 2 from the procedure “Viewing or adding work 
information” on page 94. 
The Work Info form appears. It looks slightly different, depending on 
whether you clicked View Work Info or Add Work Info. 
Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 95
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 3-12: Request Work Info form—Adding Work Information 
2 View or add information to the fields (field names in bold with asterisks are 
required fields). 
Field name Description 
Date+ Date and time when work information was created. 
Source Where work information came from, for example, Email, 
Summary A brief description of the Work Info entry. This character 
Notes A more complete description of the Work Info entry. 
View Access Sets the View Access to the work information. 
Attachments Includes any attachments that pertain to the Work Info 
Submitter System-generated field containing the login name of the 
Submit Date System-generated field that contains the date the Work 
3 Click Save. 
Web, or some other source. 
field contains a maximum of 100 characters. 
! Public—Lets the requester view the work information. 
! Internal—Only the request master can view the work 
information. 
entry. Only one attachment can be added per Work Info 
entry. 
person who submitted the Work Info entry. 
Info entry was created. 
96 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Viewing the event log and troubleshooting 
If the service request cannot be completed because of an error from the back-end 
application, you can review the event log and troubleshoot the service 
request. Overall event status is indicated by the App Event Status on the 
Change/Incident Data tab. 
Note: You need Command Event Master permissions in addition to Request 
Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 97 
Master permissions. 
" To view the event log 
1 Complete steps 1 through 7 from the procedure “To open a service request 
record” on page 92. 
2 Click View Events. 
The Event History dialog box appears. 
Figure 3-13: Event History dialog box 
3 View the event details: 
! Protocol 
! Access Mode 
! Error Code 
! Error Message
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
4 Take any of the following actions for events that are in error: 
! Retry 
! Ignore 
It is best to retry each event in the order the events are created. By default, the 
event table is sorted with the recent event on top, in reverse chronological 
order. Typical events should be retried when the problem indicated by the 
error message has been fixed. 
5 Click Close. 
Service Request form 
Only users with Request Master permissions can open the Service Request 
form directly and perform certain actions. For more information, see 
“Working with service requests as the Request Master” on page 91. 
Note: You cannot create a service request from this form. 
This section describes the form fields for reference. 
Field name Description 
Summary Summary of the request. This is populated from the New Request 
wizard. 
Requesters can select a summary definition from the Summary 
list. This list displays a list of summary definitions that have a 
status of Active. If a summary value from the Summary list is 
selected, the following fields are automatically completed: 
Category Tiers, Service Type, and Impact. 
Users can also enter data in the Summary field without making a 
selection from the Summary list. If summary data is typed in, the 
following values are set: 
! Categorization Tiers 1 through 5 = NULL 
! Impact = 3-Moderate/Limited 
! Service Type = User Service Request 
Note: Categorization data is mapped in the Operational Catalog 
Setup form. 
98 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Field name Description 
Request ID A unique identifier for the service request. User-defined prefixes 
are not supported. After a service request is submitted from the 
New Request wizard and the appropriate back-end application 
entry is created, the service request Request ID is updated with 
the back-end application’s Request ID. This provides consistent 
IDs for reference across the Requester console and the back-end 
application. 
Service Request form ! 99 
Category Tiers 
1 through 3 
Classification of the request based on the Summary. If the user 
does not select a summary from the preconfigured summary list, 
the value is set to NULL. 
Request Type This value is derived from the selected summary definition (each 
summary definition has been mapped to an appropriate request 
type, either change or incident). If the user does not select a 
summary from the preconfigured summary list, the value is set to 
Incident. If only Change Management is installed, the value is set 
to Change. 
Impact Impact of the request based on the selected summary definition. 
If the user does not select a summary from the preconfigured 
summary list, the value is set to 3-Moderate/Limited. 
This setting indicates the impact to IT operations, not the impact 
to the user requester. 
Urgency The importance of the service request to the requester: 
! Urgency—Selected by the user when creating the service 
request. 
Date Required The date by which the requester requires the service request be 
completed. 
Note: This field is for informational purposes; there is no service 
level workflow related to this field. The only workflow 
associated with this field is that an error message appears if the 
Required Date is set to a date earlier than the current date. 
Notes Further details about the service request. 
Status The status of the service request. This is a system field (Field ID 
7). All of the state transition data for SRM:Request is stored in the 
SYS:Status Transition form. Whenever the service request Status 
data is changed, SRM:Request Form workflow retrieves the 
appropriate entry from the SYS:Status Transition Lookup form 
for the previous state and current state and determines if the 
transition is valid.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Field name Description 
Status Reason A further description of the Status. 
Date Submitted The date and time the service request was submitted. This is a 
system-generated field. 
SLA Responded Service level data pushed from back-end SLM forms. If set to Yes, 
change request must be responded to. This is particularly 
important in the case of a response-time goal, where a blank SLA 
Responded field might indicate that the service target goal has 
been missed. 
Not applicable if SLM is not installed. 
Requesters tab The two tabs, Requested For and Requested By/Service Location, 
contain the same information, or information of the user who 
submitted the service request. 
Requested By/Service Location data is automatically copied to the 
Requested For fields based on the type of Submitter. 
! If the Submitter is an Unknown User (a user who is not 
registered in the People form with an AR System Login and 
People ID), the Submitter's data is copied to the Requested For 
fields. The Requested By fields are set to default user data set in 
Application settings. 
! If the Submitter is not an Unknown User (the user is registered 
in the People form with an AR System Login and People ID), 
the Submitter's data is copied to the Requested For as well as 
the Requested By fields. 
Only service requests for individuals are supported, so the Add 
Request For field is automatically set to Individual. 
SLM tab Displays the service targets and milestones for the restoration of 
the unavailability. Service targets and milestones are defined 
from within the Service Level Management applications. 
Escalations can be set up to notify the assignment group prior to 
acknowledgement or resolution breach times. 
Change/ 
Incident Data 
tab 
Provides information from the back-end application for the 
service request record. The actual back-end Change or Incident 
request information appears. 
Manager tab Provides manager information for the service request record. 
This value is pushed from the change or incident and indicates 
the owner of the request. This person is notified if the SLA is 
breached. The service request itself does not populate this field. 
Work Info tab Displays work information for the service request record. 
100 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
User’s Guide 
Working with the Solution database 
If you are creating a service request that falls into the request type of Incident, 
you might be able to resolve the request immediately if a valid solution exists 
in the solution database. After you select a summary, possible solutions 
appear only if they exist in the solution database under the same category. 
Note: The Solutions table only appears if Incident Management and Problem 
Management are installed. If you have only Change Management 
installed, this table does not display. 
" To resolve an incident request by using the Solution database 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
Working with the Solution database ! 101 
console” on page 77. 
2 Click Create a New Request. 
The New Request wizard appears. 
3 Select a Summary that can be classified as an incident. 
Figure 3-14: Possible Solutions entry
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
If there is a solution database entry that matches the summary definition, it 
appears in the Possible Solutions table. 
4 If the solution entry appears to be valid, select the entry and then click View. 
5 Review the solution entry. 
6 If the solution entry resolves your request, click Use Solution. 
The following AR Note appears: 
Your request has been submitted and will be marked Resolved. 
7 Click OK to dismiss the note. 
The request appears in the My Requests table as Resolved. 
Viewing broadcast messages 
Broadcasts (or bulletin board messages) appear in the Broadcasts table. 
Broadcasts are filtered by the logged-in user’s company. If the logged-in 
user’s company cannot be determined, then only Global broadcasts appear. 
The View button opens the Broadcasts form in dialog mode, where you can 
see details of the broadcasts, depending on your permissions. If you have 
sufficient permissions on this form, you can create, modify, or delete 
broadcasts. 
For more information about working with broadcasts, see “Viewing and 
creating broadcast messages” on page 36. 
" To view broadcasts from the Requester console 
1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester 
console” on page 77. 
2 View the broadcasts in the Broadcasts table. 
3 To refresh the list of broadcasts, click the Refresh button above the table. 
4 Select a broadcast entry, and click View to view more details. 
102 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
Chapter 4 Working with Incident 
Management as support staff 
This section describes functions that are available to support staff. Managers 
can also perform these functions from the Support Console tab. 
The following topics are provided: 
! Understanding the Support Console tab (page 104) 
! Setting application preferences (page 106) 
! Recording a new incident (page 108) 
! Understanding assignments (page 120) 
! Investigating and diagnosing an incident (page 132) 
! Resolving an incident (page 141) 
! Closing an incident (page 147) 
! Creating known errors and solutions (page 149) 
Working with Incident Management as support staff ! 103
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Understanding the Support Console tab 
The Incident Management Support console tab has been redesigned for 
version 7.0. It includes: 
! Navigation pane—Provides display filters, links to functionality, and links 
to other applications. 
! Search Criteria area—Provides area where you can search for assigned 
work. 
! Broadcast area—Displays broadcasts and provides broadcast 
functionality. For details, see “Broadcasting messages” on page 55. 
! Assigned Work area—Displays a summary of assigned incidents. The 
color of the incident indicates whether the response and resolution time 
are within the Service Level Management (SLM) agreed-upon service 
targets. When you select an incident, the summary details appear below it. 
Figure 4-1: Incident Management console—Support Console tab 
Navigation pane 
104 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Both the navigation pane and the Search Criteria provide options to filter the 
Assigned Work on the console, as summarized in the following table. 
Table 4-1: Options to filter display of assigned work 
Option Explanation 
Company If you support multiple companies, leave this field in the 
navigation pane blank to display work for all companies, or 
select the appropriate company to display work for a single 
company. 
Console View This menu in the navigation pane provides you with options to 
look at the Personal view for work assigned to you, or to view 
work assigned to your support groups. You can display work 
assigned to all your support groups or to selected support 
groups. 
Status Instead of viewing All Open Incidents, you can view all 
incidents, or all that are pending, resolved, or closed. When you 
view All Open Incidents, you view incidents available for you to 
work on, which includes assigned, in progress, and pending 
incidents. 
SLM Status To view incidents regardless of SLM status, leave this blank. 
Otherwise, select the appropriate SLM status. The SLM Status 
filter is available only if SLM is installed. 
Dates You can view incidents that were opened Any Time. You can 
also restrict the display to incidents opened within the selected 
time, such as within the last 24 hours. 
Role You can view incidents for which you are the Assignee, the 
Owner, or both at the same time. 
Advanced search You can specify one or more values on the form to search for 
specific incidents. For details, see “Using the Advanced Search 
feature” on page 40. 
Understanding the Support Console tab ! 105
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Setting application preferences 
You can set preferences to: 
! Automatically use decision trees, if available, whenever you record a new 
incident. 
! Set defaults for the consoles. 
! Determine the action that occurs after you save an Incident form. 
" To set your preferences 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 From the navigation pane, choose General Functions > Application 
Preferences. 
The Application Preferences form appears. 
Figure 4-2: Application Preferences form 
3 Update the form as appropriate. 
106 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
The following table describes the settings available on the form. 
Setting Description 
Console View The default console view, in conjunction with the search 
criteria, controls which incidents appear in the Assigned Work 
area. You can temporarily change this setting from the 
navigation pane of the console. The following selections are 
available from this list: 
! Personal—Displays incidents assigned to you. 
! Selected Groups—Prompts you to select any support groups 
to which you belong. You can select to display all incidents 
assigned to your group, or incidents assigned to your group 
that are not yet assigned to an individual. 
! All My Groups—Displays incidents assigned to all of your 
support groups. You can choose to display all incidents, or 
incidents that are not yet assigned to an individual. 
Manager Console If you select Yes, when you open the Incident Management 
console, it opens to the Manager Console tab. Otherwise, it 
opens to the Support Console tab. 
Data Set Name If there are multiple data sets, such as production and training 
data sets, select the appropriate data set. 
Setting application preferences ! 107 
Search Criteria 
Default 
Search criteria, in conjunction with the console view, control 
which incidents appear in the Assigned Work area. You can 
temporarily change these settings from the Search Criteria area 
on the console. You can set the default values for the following 
settings: 
! Incident status—Select whether to display open, pending, 
resolved, closed, or all incidents. Open incidents include 
assigned, in progress, and pending incidents. 
! SLM status—Select whether to display incidents with no 
service target assigned, within the service target, with a service 
target breached, or with all service targets breached. Clear this 
selection to display incidents regardless of SLM status. 
! Role—Select whether to display incidents where you are the 
assignee, the owner, or either. 
! Task status—This selection controls which tasks are 
displayed on the Tasks tab of the console. Select whether to 
display open tasks, closed tasks, or all tasks.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Setting Description 
After New Save This setting controls the action after you click Save on the 
Enable Auto- 
Decision Tree 
Tab Views You can choose whether to show the Vendor, Financials, or 
Overview 
Console 
4 Click Save. 
Incident form. The following selections are available from this 
list: 
! No Action—Leaves the Incident form open and it is ready for 
you to record a new incident. 
! Reopen in New—Opens the current incident in modify mode 
in a new window. The original window is ready for you to 
record a new incident. 
! Reopen in Current—Leaves the Incident form open. If this is 
a new incident, the form changes from New to Modify. 
If you select Yes from this list and a decision tree is set up, you 
are prompted by the decision tree when you record a new 
incident. For more information about decision trees, see “Using 
the decision tree” on page 114. 
Date System tabs. 
You can choose whether to show incidents or incident tasks on 
the Overview console. For information about the Overview 
console, see “Working with the Overview console” on page 31. 
Recording a new incident 
This activity is the starting point of the Incident Management process. The 
purpose of this activity is to accurately record and recognize disruptions to 
services provided by IT to its customers. When recording a new incident, you 
classify the incident and record customer information, configuration item 
(CI) information, and a description of the incident. The key to this activity is 
the accuracy and completeness of the information recorded. 
This section describes several tools to assist you in recording a new incident: 
! “Using the Process Flow Status wizard to record a new incident” on 
page 109 
! “Using a template” on page 112 
! “Using the decision tree” on page 114 
! “Using scripts” on page 114 
108 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
This section also describes activities you might need to perform while 
recording a new incident: 
! “Relating incidents as duplicates” on page 114 
Recording a new incident ! 109 
! “Recording CI unavailability” on page 116 
! “Adding or modifying a customer profile” on page 117 
Using the Process Flow Status wizard to record a new incident 
By using the Process Flow Status wizard when recording a new incident, you 
are prompted to enter the required fields and optional recommended fields 
to move the incident to the next stage. 
Tip: The Process Flow Status wizard provides one method of recording and 
updating incidents. All fields in the dialog box are also available on the 
Incident form. You can complete these fields directly from the form, if you 
prefer. 
" To record an incident with the Process Flow Status wizard 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 From the navigation pane, choose General Functions > New Incident. 
The New Incident form appears. 
3 In the Process Flow Status area, click the arrow in the Identification and 
Recording box. 
4 Choose Next Stage > Investigation and Diagnosis. 
You can move directly to the Resolution and Recovery stage or the Incident 
Closure Stage by selecting the appropriate stage.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 4-3: Selecting the next stage from the Process Flow Status wizard 
The Create Incident form appears. The two tabs on this form prompt you to 
enter required and optional information. 
Note: This is a dynamic form. The fields on the Required and Optional tabs 
depend on the information to move from the current stage or state to the 
selected stage or state. 
Figure 4-4: Create Incident form displaying completed Required Information tab 
5 Type the customer’s last name in the Last Name field and press ENTER. 
110 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
If there are multiple customers with the same last name, you are prompted 
to select the appropriate customer. The Company, First Name, and Phone 
Number fields are completed from the customer record. The company drives 
the selection on other menus, such as Operational, Product, and Resolution 
Categorization. 
6 Type a brief description in the Summary field. 
7 You can type additional details in the Notes field. 
8 Select values from the Impact and Urgency lists. 
9 If appropriate, select a different service company. 
When you select the customer, the service company is set to the customer’s 
company. 
10 If appropriate, change the service type from the default value of user service 
restoration. You can select user service request, infrastructure restoration, or 
infrastructure event. 
Recording a new incident ! 111 
11 To enter optional recommended information: 
a Click the Optional Information tab. 
Figure 4-5: Create Incident form displaying completed Optional Information tab 
b Select the appropriate operational categorization.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Operational categorization is based on a three-tier hierarchy that is 
defined in the Operational Catalog configuration form. 
c Select the appropriate product categorization. 
Product categorization is based on a five-tier hierarchy that is defined in 
the Product Catalog configuration form. 
12 Click Save. 
If you did not assign the incident, the incident is automatically assigned 
based on predefined assignment routing. If there is no appropriate 
predefined assignment routing, you are prompted to assign the incident. 
13 If prompted, assign the incident, then click Save. 
Using a template 
You can use templates to populate the incident with standard information 
that is entered on a regular basis. A template can also set a relationship to a 
CI. Your administrator can create templates for commonly occurring 
incidents, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 
Configuration Guide. 
" To use a template 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 From the navigation pane, choose General Functions > New Incident. 
The New Incident form appears. 
3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Identification and Recording box, 
choose Select Template. 
If you belong to more than one support group, you are prompted to select 
the appropriate support group first. 
A list of templates available to your support group appears. 
112 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Recording a new incident ! 113 
Figure 4-6: Incident Template Selection dialog box 
4 Highlight the appropriate template, then click Select. 
Part of the incident is completed, as defined by the template. 
Figure 4-7: Incident form partially completed by template 
5 Complete the incident as appropriate. 
6 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Using the decision tree 
A decision tree takes you step-by-step through a questionnaire, and, based on 
your answers, completes part of the form for a new incident. Each element in 
the decision tree displays a list of items. Your final selection completes part 
of the incident. 
Decision trees are built by a manager or administrator at your company. 
You can set up your preferences to use available decision trees whenever you 
start a new incident. For details, see “Setting application preferences” on 
page 106. 
Using scripts 
Scripts are detailed instructions that have been set up at your company to 
help you record important information about an incident. You have access 
to scripts that have been set up for your support group. Scripts might include 
a list of questions to ask the customer. These questions can assist you in 
resolving or assigning the incident. 
There are two types of scripts: 
! Initiator scripts—Select an initiator script when you record an incident 
after you indicate the customer. 
! Assignment scripts—Select an assignment script when you assign or 
reassign an incident after you indicate the assignee. The assignment scripts 
correspond to the group to which you are assigning the incident. For 
example, a networking group might have specific questions for you to ask 
the user when you assign the incident. 
Relating incidents as duplicates 
You can relate an incident to another as a duplicate. The original incident 
resolves all of its duplicates. When someone resolves or closes the original 
incident, its Operational and Product Categorizations and Resolution fields 
are copied to the related duplicates, marking them with a status of Resolved. 
" To relate an incident as a duplicate 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 From the navigation pane, open an incident currently being investigated. 
114 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
3 Click the Relationships tab. 
4 From the Request Type list, select Incident, then click Search. 
The Incident Relationship Search dialog box appears. 
5 Enter the search criteria to locate the original incident, then click Search. 
Incidents matching the search criteria appear on the bottom half of the form. 
Figure 4-8: Incident Relationship Search dialog box with results displayed 
6 Select the duplicate incident. 
7 If the current incident is a duplicate of the original incident, from the 
Recording a new incident ! 115 
Relationship Type list, select Duplicate of. 
8 If the current incident is the original incident, which the selected incident 
duplicates, from the Relationship Type list, select Original of. 
9 Click Relate. 
The Incident Relationship Search dialog box closes. The two incidents are 
related as duplicate and original. The status of the duplicate incident is 
Pending, with a status reason of Pending Original Incident. 
10 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Recording CI unavailability 
CI unavailability is the actual down-time of a CI. You can record CI 
unavailability due to an unexpected circumstance from the incident. 
Note: You can record CI unavailability only if Asset Management is installed. 
" To record CI unavailability 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Relationships tab. 
4 To search for a CI, choose Quick Links > CI Search. 
The CI Relationships Search form appears. 
5 Select the CI in the CIs table. 
Figure 4-9: CIs table 
6 In the Relationship Type field, select the relationship type. 
7 Click Relate with Unavailability. 
Note: Relate with Unavailability is available only when you are searching for 
CIs to relate to an incident. 
The Configuration Item Unavailability form appears. 
116 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Recording a new incident ! 117 
Figure 4-10: Configuration Item Unavailability form 
8 In the Unavailability Type list, select whether the unavailability is scheduled 
or unscheduled, and whether it is full or partial unavailability. 
9 Select the actual start date of the unavailability. 
10 Complete other fields of the form, as appropriate. 
11 Click Save. 
12 Close the CI Relationship Search dialog box. 
13 On the Incident form, click Save. 
Adding or modifying a customer profile 
Before you can record an incident, the customer must be listed in the People 
database. This access is configured by your administrator, as described in the 
BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 
Adding a new customer profile 
If a customer is not listed in the database, you can add a customer’s profile. 
" To add a new customer profile 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Contact tab. 
4 Click Create. 
The People form appears. 
Figure 4-11: People form used to add a customer profile 
5 Complete the required fields. 
You do not need to add all of the information for this individual’s profile, 
only what is necessary to submit the record. 
Note: You cannot define a Support Person record here. See the BMC Remedy 
IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide for further details. 
6 After you have finished entering the information, click Save. 
The status of the person you added has a default value of Proposed. Your 
People/Contact administrator must verify those in proposed status, update 
them to Enabled, and add any other information that is necessary. 
118 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Modifying a customer profile 
To modify a customer profile, you require access to the People database. 
Note: You can modify the customer and contact phone number and location 
on the Incident form without modifying the customer profile. A 
modification on the Incident form, however, applies only to the current 
incident. 
" To modify a customer profile 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
Recording a new incident ! 119 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Search for and select a customer in the Contact Information section. 
4 Click Modify. 
The People form appears, displaying the customer’s profile. 
Figure 4-12: People form used to modify a customer profile 
5 Change the information, as required.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Accessing the individual’s People Profile this way gives you limited 
information that you can change. You can change the information in the top 
of the form and the information in the General and More Details tabs. 
6 Click Save. 
Understanding assignments 
An incident can be assigned to an individual or a support group. The 
Assignment tab displays details of the current assignment. 
Version 7.0 adds tasks to Incident Management. You can attach tasks to an 
incident and assign them to individuals without changing the assignment of 
the incident. 
Figure 4-13: Assignment tab 
This section includes the following topics: 
! “Receiving notification of assignments” on page 121 
! “Working with assignments” on page 121 
! “Reassigning an incident” on page 124 
! “Working with tasks” on page 127 
120 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Understanding assignments ! 121 
Receiving notification of assignments 
When an incident is assigned to you, you can receive notification through: 
! BMC Remedy Alert 
! Email 
You configure how you receive each notification from the People form, as 
described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration 
Guide. 
All incidents assigned to you or your support groups appear in the Incident 
Management and Overview consoles. 
For additional information about notifications sent from Incident 
Management, see “Understanding notifications” on page 160. 
Working with assignments 
When you work on open incidents, you are working on incidents assigned to 
you or to your support group. You can also assist with an incident assigned 
to another support group when a task is assigned to you. 
This section includes the following topics: 
! “Viewing incidents assigned to you” on page 121 
! “Accepting an assignment” on page 122 
! “Recording time worked on an incident” on page 122 
Viewing incidents assigned to you 
You can view the summary and detail of incidents assigned to you. 
" To view incidents assigned to you 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 From the navigation pane, choose Console View > Personal.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
3 To view additional details about an incident, perform any of the following 
actions. 
Action Result 
Click the incident. The Details tab displays details about the 
selected incident. 
Click the incident, then click View. The Incident form appears, displaying the 
incident. You can modify the form and 
perform other actions, as appropriate. 
Accepting an assignment 
You can accept any incident assigned to your support group. 
" To accept an assignment 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Change the Status to In Progress. 
4 In the navigation pane, choose Quick Links > Assign to Me. 
5 Click Save. 
Recording time worked on an incident 
On the Assignment tab, use the Current Assignee Effort Time area to track 
the effort time that you spend on an incident. You can enter the time in the 
Effort Time Spent Minutes field, or you can use the automatic timer. Your 
total effort time is then saved in the Assignment Log. 
If you are not assigned to an incident, you can record that you have assisted 
with the incident. 
The Total Time Spent Minutes field displays the total effort time spent on the 
incident per session. 
" To record time worked on an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
122 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Understanding assignments ! 123 
3 Click the Assignment tab. 
4 Click Update Assignment Log. 
The Incident Assignment Log dialog box appears. 
Figure 4-14: Incident Assignment Log dialog box 
5 Complete the form as appropriate. 
You can change the Effort Time Spent (Minutes) field for your own 
assignment logs, but not for those of other support groups or individuals. 
Alternatively, you can use the automatic timer while you perform work. 
While an incident is assigned to you, effort time is being tracked by the 
application. To stop the clock when you are not working on the incident, 
click Stopped on the Assignment tab. To restart the clock, click Start. 
6 Click Add to save your total effort time in the assignment log. 
Note: Nobody can delete a completed assignment log.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Reassigning an incident 
You can reassign an incident to either an individual or a support group. You 
can also assign an incident to a vendor. Use the shortcut in the navigation 
pane to reassign an incident to yourself (Assign to Me) or to reassign an 
incident based on automatic routing (Auto Assign). 
" To reassign an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 To assign the incident to yourself, in the navigation pane, choose Quick Links 
> Assign to Me. 
Figure 4-15: Navigation pane links to assign incidents 
4 To reassign the incident based on automatic routing, in the navigation pane, 
choose Functions > Auto Assign. 
This assigns the incident based on predefined mapping. Automated 
assignment can be based on the customer organization, incident location, 
operational categorization, or product categorization. 
5 Otherwise, follow these steps to reassign the investigation. 
a Click the Assignment tab. 
b Reassign the investigation. 
You have several options available, as follows: 
! Select the Assigned Group from the list. 
! After selecting an Assigned Group, select the Assignee from the list. 
Click here to assign an 
incident to yourself. 
Click here to reassign the 
incident based on 
automatic routing. 
124 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
! Select from Set Assignment using, as indicated in the following table. 
Set Assignment using Description 
My Default Group Assigns the incident to you and your default group. 
My Group List Opens a list of all groups to which you belong. Select 
the appropriate group from this list. 
Favorite Groups Assigns the incident to the typical groups to which 
your support group assigns incidents. 
Auto Assign The same as the Auto Assign link in the navigation 
pane, this assigns the incident based on predefined 
mapping. 
Current Owner Resets the incident assignee to the incident owner. 
For example, if several people have worked to 
resolve the incident, you might assign the incident 
back to the owner to communicate the resolution to 
the customer. For details on the default value for the 
Incident owner, see “Understanding incident 
ownership.” 
6 Click Save. 
Understanding incident ownership 
Incident ownership is set when the incident is submitted. The incident owner 
depends on the support group membership of the person submitting the 
incident, as well as the support group being assigned the incident. 
For example, consider the following three support groups: 
! Support Group A has a support group role of Help Desk. Person A is in 
Understanding assignments ! 125 
Support Group A. 
! Support Group B does not have a support group role of Help Desk; for 
example, it might have a support group role of Tier 2. Person B is in 
Support Group B. 
! Support Group C does not have a support group role of Help Desk; for 
example, it might have a support group role of Tier 3.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Based on these support groups, the following example events show how the 
incident owner is set: 
! Person A submits an incident. Because Person A is a member of a support 
group with the role of Help Desk, ownership of the incident is set to 
Support Group A, regardless of who is assigned this incident. 
! Person B submits an incident and assigns it to Support Group A. 
Ownership of the incident is set to Support Group A because the group 
has the role of Help Desk. 
! Person B submits another incident, and assigns the incident to Support 
Group C. Support Group B becomes the owner, because Person B is the 
submitter. 
Assigning an incident to a vendor 
When you work with a vendor to resolve an incident, you can indicate that 
the incident is assigned to the vendor. The following procedure is used to 
track incidents that require vendor support. 
" To assign an incident to a vendor 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Vendor tab. 
Figure 4-16: Vendor tab 
4 To assign the incident to a vendor support group, select the vendor company, 
organization, and group. 
126 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Note: If you select a vendor company, organization, and group, the 
application sends email notification to the vendor. Otherwise, you must 
must communicate with the vendor as appropriate. 
5 If you selected the vendor from the menus, you can press ENTER in either of 
the vendor name fields to select the vendor contact. If the vendor is not listed, 
you can type the vendor contact information. 
If you type the vendor contact, the Vendor Email field is for information 
only; Incident Management does not send email to this contact. 
6 Enter any other information you need to track, such as the vendor incident 
Understanding assignments ! 127 
number. 
7 Click Save. 
The Vendor Assignment Status field is set to Assigned. The Reported to 
Vendor Date is set to the current date and time, if you did not specify 
otherwise. 
Working with tasks 
You can assign tasks to one or more people without changing the assignment 
of the incident. 
Creating tasks 
You can create tasks for open incidents, as appropriate. 
" To create a task 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Tasks tab. 
The Tasks tab displays tasks associated with the incident.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 4-17: Tasks tab 
4 Click Create. 
The Task form appears. 
Figure 4-18: Completed Task form 
5 Type a brief description of the task in the Name field. 
The task name appears in the summary on the Tasks tab, as well as in 
notification messages. 
6 Type a detailed summary of the task to be performed in the Summary field. 
7 Complete other fields on the form, as appropriate. 
8 To record work information for this task: 
a On the General tab, click Create Work Info. 
128 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Understanding assignments ! 129 
The Work Info form appears. 
Figure 4-19: Completed Work Info form 
b Complete the form, as described in “Adding work information” on 
page 51. 
c Click Save. 
9 Click Save again. 
The task is assigned based on the location and organization. Notification is 
sent to the task assignee. 
Manually assigning a task 
You can manually set the assignment for any task, if appropriate. 
" To assign a task 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open a task, as described in “Creating tasks” on page 127. 
3 On the Task form, click the Assignments tab. 
If you manually assign the task when creating the task, the Assignment and 
Dates tabs are combined as the Assignment/Dates tab.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 4-20: Completed Assignment tab 
Figure 4-21: Completed Assignment/Dates tab 
4 Select the company, organization, assignee group, and assignee. 
5 If appropriate, schedule the start and end dates. 
6 Click Save. 
Recording work performed on tasks 
You might be assigned tasks to perform for incidents not assigned to you. 
When a task is assigned to you, notification is sent to you. 
" To record work performed on a task 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Tasks tab. 
4 Select the task. 
5 Click View. 
The Task form appears. 
130 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Understanding assignments ! 131 
Figure 4-22: Assigned task 
6 Select the appropriate status. 
Tasks can be staged, assigned, pending, work in progress, waiting, closed, or 
bypassed. 
Note: The waiting status is used only for automatic tasks, which are not 
applicable to incident management. 
7 Select the appropriate status reason. 
If you close the task, you must select whether you are canceling the task or 
completing it as a success or failure. 
8 Click the Assignment tab. 
Figure 4-23: Tracking effort on the Assignment tab
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
9 To track effort spent on the task: 
! When you start working on the task, click Start Clock. 
! When you stop working on the task, click Stop Clock. 
! To record additional details about the effort, to manually record time 
spent working on a task, or to view details of past effort, click Effort Log. 
The Task Effort Log dialog box appears. Close the dialog box when you are 
finished. 
10 Click the Work Info tab. 
11 Complete the Work Info tab, as described in “Adding work information” on 
page 51. 
12 Click Save. 
Investigating and diagnosing an incident 
In this activity, you search existing information to identify a possible 
solution. After you identify the possible solution, you can resolve it, as 
described in “Resolving an incident” on page 141. 
If the incident cannot be resolved or a root cause analysis is required, the 
incident can be escalated to Problem Management. You can launch a 
problem investigation in conjunction with the incident to discover the root 
cause and solution. Keep in mind that the incident is managed as a separate 
process, and remains open until it is resolved. 
The following topics describe work you might perform while investigating 
and diagnosing an incident: 
! “Viewing an incident” on page 133 
! “Adding work information” on page 51 
! “Searching for a solution” on page 135 
! “Recording the cost of working on an incident” on page 139 
132 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 133 
Viewing an incident 
You can view an incident from the Assigned Work area. 
" To view an incident 
1 In the Assigned Work area, select the incident. 
2 Click View. The Incident form appears. 
Figure 4-24: Incident at investigation and diagnosis stage 
Fields on the form display the incident status and information that has been 
collected about the incident. 
Process flow 
status 
As the incident moves through its life cycle, the Process Flow Status area 
displays the current stage of the incident. In Figure 4-24 the incident is at the 
second stage, which is the investigation and diagnosis stage. The stage is 
highlighted in white and includes the label Normal. If the incident were 
pending further action, the current stage would be highlighted in yellow and 
include the label Pending. 
For more information about the incident process flow, see “Process flow and 
the life cycle of an incident request” on page 24.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Service Level 
Management 
(SLM) 
If SLM is installed, the Incident form displays both overview and in-depth 
information about the incident in relation to applicable service targets. 
The SLM Status area shows whether the incident breaches service targets 
defined in SLM, as described in Table 4-2. An incident can have service 
targets for response time and resolution time. 
Table 4-2: Service targets indicator colors and SLM status 
Color SLM status Description 
Green Within the Service Target Incident does not violate the 
If the incident was recorded directly from an email, fax, voicemail, or web 
self-serve request, the Responded field appears next to the Service Target 
indicator. After you respond to the incident, select Yes. 
Important: If you respond to an incident and leave the Responded field set to 
No, the incident might breach the response service terms. 
For additional information about the relevant service targets, click the SLM 
tab. The Service Targets table displays all service targets applicable to the 
incident. Select a service target to see the status, next target date, exception 
details, and applicable milestones. 
Figure 4-25: SLM tab 
134 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff 
conditions of the service targets. 
Yellow Service Target Breached At least one service target has been 
breached. 
Red All Service Targets Breached The terms of all service targets have 
been breached. 
Gray No Service Target Assigned Incident has no applicable service 
targets.
User’s Guide 
The Next Target Date field indicates the next deadline out of all the service 
targets attached to the incident. The SLM Status displays the status 
corresponding to the Service Target indicator on the top of the form. 
If the service terms have been breached, select the breach reason and breach 
exception. 
For more information about service targets and milestones, see the BMC 
Service Level Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 
Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 135 
Searching for a solution 
You can search for information that might help resolve the current incident. 
You can search for this information in other incidents, problem 
investigations, known errors, and solution database entries. 
" To search for a solution 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Incident Matching. 
The Incident Matching dialog box appears. 
4 Select the appropriate check boxes to search for incidents, problem 
investigations, known errors, or solution database entries. 
5 To search using the incident’s operational categorization, in the Search By 
Operational Categorization area, click Current Operation. 
The operational categorization fields populate with the current incident’s 
operational categorization. 
6 To search using the incident’s product categorization, in the Search By 
Product Categorization area, click Current Product. 
The product categorization fields populate with the current incident’s 
product categorization. 
7 To further filter the search results, you can specify the other fields in the 
search criteria pages. 
8 Click Search.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Matching incidents, problem investigations, known errors, and solutions are 
listed in the tabs at the bottom half of the dialog box. 
Figure 4-26: Incident Matching dialog box displaying search results 
9 To view details of a matching record, perform the following steps: 
a On the bottom half of the screen, click the appropriate tab, such as the 
Known Errors tab. 
This tab lists matching records, such as matching known errors. 
b Select the appropriate record. 
c On the top half of the screen, click the appropriate Search and Solution 
tab, such as the Known Error Search and Solution tab, then within that tab 
click the solution tab, such as the View Known Error Solution tab. 
This tab displays details of the selected record. 
10 If the record resolves the current incident, from the Relationship Type list, 
select Resolved by. 
11 To relate the record and copy the solution to the resolution of the incident, 
click Relate with Solution. 
136 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
12 Alternatively, to relate the record without the solution, click Relate Without 
Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 137 
Solution. 
13 If a solution or work-around is available, then continue with “Moving the 
incident to the resolution stage.” 
Moving the incident to the resolution stage 
When you find a possible solution or work-around for the incident, you are 
ready to move it to the resolution stage. 
" To move the incident to the resolution stage 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Investigation and Diagnosis box, 
choose Next Stage > Resolution and Recovery. 
Figure 4-27: Selecting resolution and recovery 
. 
The Modify Incident form appears, displaying the required and optional 
fields to move the incident to the resolution and recovery stage.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 4-28: Completed required fields on Modify Incident form 
4 If the incident is not assigned, the Modify Incident form also prompts you to 
assign the incident. 
5 Type the proposed resolution in the Resolution field. 
6 Summarize the work you performed to find the proposed resolution by 
completing the fields in the Add Work Info area. 
7 To prevent changes to this record of your work performed, change the 
Locked status to Yes. 
8 If this incident is linked to a request, to allow the customer to see this 
summary of work performed, change the View Access status to External. 
9 To complete recommended optional information: 
a Click the Optional Information tab. 
138 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Figure 4-29: Completed optional information 
b Select the appropriate product categorization. 
Product categorization is based on a five-tier hierarchy that is defined in 
the Product Catalog configuration form. 
c Select the appropriate resolution categorization. 
d Click Save. 
Recording the cost of working on an incident 
You can record the cost involved in working on an incident on the Financials 
tab of the Incident form. 
" To record the cost of working on an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 139 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Financials tab. 
4 Click Create. 
The Costs form appears.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 4-30: Completed Costs form 
The Cost Category field is set to Incident. This indicates the form from which 
you are entering the charge. You cannot change this value. 
5 Select the appropriate cost center code from the list. 
This is the code name for the business unit or organization within the 
company to be charged for servicing the incident. When you select the cost 
center code, the Company and Cost Center Name fields display the values 
attached to the cost center code. 
6 From the Cost Classification list, select either Actual or Budget. 
7 In the Related Cost field, type the rate, and select the currency from the list. 
8 If appropriate, you can also: 
! Select the cost type. Cost types are defined by your organization for 
reporting purposes. 
! Enter a description. 
! Select the unit type. The unit type indicates whether cost is measured as a 
flat rate, or in hours or minutes. If you select a unit type of hours or 
minutes, you must type the number of hours or minutes in the Related 
Units field. 
140 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
! Enter the date the charge was incurred. If you leave this field blank, it is set 
Resolving an incident ! 141 
to the current date when you save the cost. 
9 Click Save. 
The totals for budgeted and actual costs appear at the bottom of the table. 
10 Repeat steps 4 through 9 for each cost associated with the incident. 
Resolving an incident 
The main purpose of this activity is to resolve and recover from the service 
disruption to enable the customer to resume work. 
" To resolve an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Resolution and Recovery box, choose 
Next Stage > Incident Closure. 
The Modify Incident form appears. 
Figure 4-31: Modify Incident form
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
The Resolution field shows the resolution that was proposed when the 
incident was moved to the resolution and recovery stage. 
4 If appropriate, change the resolution. 
The resolution is included in the email notification sent to the customer. If 
you leave this field blank, you must specify the resolution categorization on 
the Optional Information tab. 
5 Select the appropriate status reason. 
The status reason can indicate action required before the incident is closed. 
6 In the Add Work Info area, specify the work performed to resolve the 
incident. 
7 You can click the Optional Information tab to enter additional information 
as follows: 
a In the Resolution Product Categorization area, select from up to five lists 
to specify the product categorization of the underlying CI that caused the 
incident. 
The default value is the same as the incident product categorization. 
b In the Resolution Categorization area, select either: 
! Actions taken to resolve the incident. 
! Service categories of the underlying causes. 
142 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Resolving an incident ! 143 
Figure 4-32: Completed Optional Information tab 
8 Click Save. 
The status of the incident is set to Resolved. 
If CI unavailability was created from this incident and your support group is 
responsible for the CI unavailability, then you are prompted to update the CI 
unavailability. 
Figure 4-33: Selecting CI unavailability to update
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
! To update the CI unavailability, for example, if the CI is now available, 
click Update. For details on CI unavailability, see “Recording CI 
unavailability” on page 116. 
! To continue resolving the incident without updating the CI, click Close 
and Continue Save. 
! To return to the Incident form without saving, click Close and Cancel 
Save. 
9 If appropriate, you can complete additional fields on the Resolution tab of 
the Incident form as follows. 
Field name Description 
Resolution Method Method to resolve the incident, such as Service Desk 
assisted. 
Cause Cause of the incident. 
10 If you complete additional fields on the Incident form, remember to click 
Save to save your changes. 
11 If appropriate, publish the resolution into the solution database, as described 
in “Creating known errors and solutions” on page 149. 
Creating a problem investigation from an incident 
If you are not able to resolve the incident, you should escalate it to the 
problem management process. For example, root cause analysis might be 
required to identify the underlying problem. If you have access to Problem 
Management, you can create a problem investigation from an incident. 
If the incident is still open when the related problem investigation is 
completed, the assignee is notified. If the problem investigation results in a 
known error, the incident assignee is notified when a work-around or 
permanent solution is found. 
" To create a problem investigation from an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
144 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Resolution and Recovery box, choose 
Resolving an incident ! 145 
Generate Problem. 
Figure 4-34: Selecting Generate Problem 
A Problem Investigation form appears. The Description, Impact and 
Urgency, Product and Service Categorization, and Resolution fields from the 
incident are copied to the problem investigation. A relationship is created 
between the problem investigation and the incident. 
Figure 4-35: Problem investigation generated from incident 
4 Complete the Problem Investigation form. 
For information about recording problem investigations, see the BMC 
Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 
5 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Creating infrastructure change from an incident 
If infrastructure change is required to permanently resolve the incident, you 
should initiate the change management process. If the Change Management 
application is installed and you have permission to use the Change 
Management application, you can create an infrastructure change from an 
incident. 
If the incident is open when the change is completed, the assignee is notified. 
" To create infrastructure change from an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Resolution and Recovery box, choose 
Generate Change. 
A Change Request form appears. The Product and Operational 
Categorization are copied from the incident to the infrastructure change. A 
relationship is created between the change and the incident. 
Figure 4-36: Change generated from incident 
4 Complete the Change Request form. 
For information about recording change requests, see the BMC Remedy 
Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 
5 Click Save. 
146 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Closing an incident ! 147 
Reopening a resolved incident 
If the recorded resolution did not resolve the incident, you can reopen the 
incident. This moves the incident back to the resolution and recovery stage. 
Note: If the incident is closed, it can be reopened only by a support group 
lead or support group manager for the group that owns the incident, or by 
someone with Incident Master permission. 
" To reopen a resolved incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the Process Flow Status area in the Closure box, choose Reopen. 
The incident moves back to the resolution and recovery stage, and the status 
changes from Resolved to In Progress. 
Closing an incident 
The main purpose of this activity is to make sure that the incident has 
successfully restored the service to the customer and that the customer is 
satisfied with the outcome. When the customer agrees that the incident can 
be closed, review the incident record for completion and, if appropriate, 
create a solution database entry. 
If you leave an incident as resolved, after 15 days the Incident Management 
application closes the incident. 
Note: After you close an incident, it can be reopened only by a support group 
lead or support group manager for the group that owns the incident, or by 
someone with Incident Master permission. You can continue to add Work 
Info entries, but you cannot modify the incident. 
" To close an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Review the Incident form to make sure that it is complete and accurate. 
Figure 4-37: Incident being reviewed for closure 
Optional fields include: 
! Status Reason—If appropriate, select Infrastructure Change Created. 
! Closure Source—This list is located on the Resolution tab. Select Support 
Agent. If the customer closes an incident from the Request console, this 
field is set to Customer. The system might be configured to close an 
incident a number of days after the incident is resolved; when this 
happens, the Closure Source value is System. 
! Satisfaction Rating—Select the customer’s reported satisfaction with the 
handling of the incident. 
4 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Incident Closure box, choose Close. 
The status to now set to Closed. If the incident was broadcast, the broadcast 
is removed. 
5 Click Save. 
148 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Creating known errors and solutions 
If the incident resolution is a known error or a good candidate for the 
solution database, you can propose an entry. 
Creating a known error from an incident 
If you have access to Problem Management, you can create a known error 
from an incident. 
" To create a known error from an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
Creating known errors and solutions ! 149 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the navigation pane, choose Create Other Requests > Create Known error. 
The Known Error form appears. The relevant details from the incident are 
copied to the known error. 
Figure 4-38: Known error created from incident 
4 Complete the Known Error form, as described in the BMC Remedy Service 
Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 
5 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Creating a solution database entry from an incident 
If you have access to Problem Management, you can publish the resolution 
from an incident into the solution database. 
" To create a solution entry from an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Resolution tab. 
Figure 4-39: Incident form open to the Resolution tab 
4 Click Create and Edit Solution. 
The Solution form appears. The resolution details are already copied into the 
form. 
150 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
User’s Guide 
Figure 4-40: Solution created from incident 
Creating known errors and solutions ! 151 
5 Edit the form as required. 
6 Click Save. 
Tip: To avoid editing the Solution Database form, click Quick Create 
Solution. This copies the resolution details into the form, submits the 
solution entry as Inactive, sets the view access to Internal, and assigns the 
solution entry to the appropriate support group.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
152 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
Chapter 5 Working with Incident 
Management as a manager 
This section describes functions that are available to managers. An individual 
is defined as an incident manager by giving the user the functional role of 
incident manager or Support Group Manager for the support groups to 
which he or she belongs. For details, see the BMC Remedy IT Service 
Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 
The following topics are provided: 
! Understanding the Manager Console tab (page 154) 
! Managing assignments (page 155) 
! Reopening a closed incident (page 159) 
! Understanding SLM calculations (page 160) 
! Understanding notifications (page 160) 
! Viewing the audit log (page 162) 
Working with Incident Management as a manager ! 153
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Understanding the Manager Console tab 
With Incident Management version 7.0, managers now have a separate 
console. This console includes: 
! Navigation pane—Provides display filters, links to functionality, and links 
to other applications. 
! Search Criteria area—Used to search for assigned work. 
! Broadcast area—Displays broadcasts and provides broadcast 
functionality. For details, see “Broadcasting messages” on page 55. 
! Assigned Work area—Displays a summary of assigned incidents. 
! Flashboards area—Provides a high-level graphical overview. 
Figure 5-1: Incident Management console—Manager Console tab 
Navigation pane 
154 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
User’s Guide 
Both the navigation pane and Search Criteria area provide options to filter 
the assigned work on the console, as summarized in the following table. 
Table 5-1: Options to filter display of assigned work 
Option Explanation 
Company If you support multiple companies, leave this blank to display 
work for all companies, or select the appropriate company. 
Console View You can look at the personal view for work assigned to you, or 
you can change to view work assigned to your support groups. 
You can also view work that has been assigned to your support 
group, but is still unassigned to an individual. 
SLM Status To view incidents regardless of SLM status, leave this blank. 
Otherwise, select the appropriate SLM status. The SLM Status 
filter is available only if SLM is installed. 
Dates You can view open assigned incidents that were opened any 
time. You can also restrict the display to incidents opened 
within the selected time, such as within the last 24 hours. 
Role Incident managers can select either the Incident Manager or 
Managing assignments ! 155 
Assignee role. 
Managing assignments 
An incident can be assigned to an individual or a group. 
Viewing unassigned incidents 
An incident can be assigned to your support group without being assigned to 
an individual. View the unassigned incidents, then assign them as described 
in “Assigning an incident” on page 156. 
" To view unassigned incidents 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 From the navigation pane, perform one of the following steps: 
! Choose Console View > Select My Groups > Show Unassigned. 
! Choose Console View > All My Groups > Show Unassigned.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
3 If you are viewing unassigned incidents, from the Selected Groups list, you 
must confirm the selected groups, as follows. 
The My Group Selection dialog box appears. 
Figure 5-2: My Group Selection dialog box 
a In the View Group column, for each group, select Yes to indicate display 
incidents assigned to that group. 
b Click Update. 
The Assigned Work area shows unassigned incidents for the selected support 
groups. 
Assigning an incident 
You can assign the incident to anyone within your support group. To 
reassign the incident to another support group or to an assignee in another 
support group, see “Reassigning an incident” on page 124. 
" To assign an incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 Click the Assignment tab. 
156 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
User’s Guide 
Managing assignments ! 157 
Figure 5-3: Completed Assignment tab 
4 Select the appropriate assignee or support group. 
5 Click Save. 
Monitoring an incident's status 
You can monitor an incident’s status through process flow, the Status field, 
and the assignment log. Process flow indicates the current stage and state of 
an incident. The Status field provides additional information. The 
assignment log indicates the history of assigned work that has been 
performed on the incident. 
Process flow Process flow provides a quick visual indicator of the current stage and state 
of an incident. When you open an incident, the Process Flow Status area 
appears toward the top of the form. 
Figure 5-4: Process Flow status area 
For additional information, see “Process flow and the life cycle of an incident 
request” on page 24.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Status field The Status field changes during the life cycle of the incident. 
Assignment 
log 
Table 5-2: Significance of the status field 
Status Description 
New The incident is unassigned. You can see this status only while 
completing a new incident. After you save the incident, the status 
changes to Assigned. 
Assigned The incident has been assigned to a support group or individual 
but has not yet been acknowledged. 
In Progress The assignment has been accepted and the assignee is working 
toward resolution. 
Pending Work on the incident has been temporarily suspended. 
Resolved A resolution or work-around to restore the service has been 
determined and is awaiting customer validation. 
Closed A resolution or work-around has restored the service and the 
customer has validated the resolution. 
Canceled Restoration of service is no longer required. 
The assignment log displays a list of all the groups and individuals that were 
assigned to work on the incident during its life cycle. One unique entry is 
generated for each individual and group assigned to work on the incident, 
but they are not arranged chronologically. To access the assignment log, click 
the Assignment tab, then click Update Assignment Log. 
Figure 5-5: Incident Assignment Log dialog box 
158 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
User’s Guide 
Reopening a closed incident ! 159 
There are three types of assignment logs: 
! Initiated—This assignment log is generated by the application when the 
incident is submitted. It indicates who generated the incident and how 
long it took for the incident to be submitted to the application. 
! Assigned—This assignment log is generated by the application when the 
incident is reassigned or resolved. 
! Assisted—This assignment log is manually generated when a user follows 
the procedure described in “Recording time worked on an incident” on 
page 122. It tracks the amount of time spent by an individual who assisted 
with the incident, but who was not officially assigned to the incident. 
The fields for Group Transfers, Individual Transfers, and Total Transfers 
track the reassignments of the incident. 
Reopening a closed incident 
If you are a support group lead or support group manager, you can reopen 
closed incidents that your support group owns. If you have Incident Master 
permission, you can also reopen incidents owned by other support groups. 
If an incident is resolved, but not yet closed, anyone with access to the 
incident can reopen it, as described in “Reopening a resolved incident” on 
page 147. 
" To reopen a closed incident 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Reopen Incident. 
This creates a new incident, copying information from the closed incident to 
the new incident, and defining a relationship between the two incidents. 
4 Make any required changes to the new incident. 
5 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Understanding SLM calculations 
From the Incident form, you can view incident service targets defined in 
SLM, as described in “Viewing an incident” on page 133. Service targets can 
be defined in SLM for response time, and resolution time. Service targets for 
an incident can be determined by related CIs, product and service 
categorization, and many other criteria. 
The service target response time applies when an incident is recorded from 
an email, fax, voicemail, or web self-serve request. In this case the Responded 
Date is blank until someone indicates that the incident has been responded 
to (in the Responded field next to the SLM status indicators). When support 
staff record an incident, the Responded Date is set to the date that the 
incident is recorded. 
In general, the service target resolution time is calculated from when the 
incident is recorded until it is resolved. The following scenarios can affect the 
calculated resolution time: 
! When an incident is in a pending state, it might not be included in SLM 
calculations, depending on the Status Reason. 
! When a resolved incident is reopened, the SLM calculations account for 
time spent in the resolved state. 
Understanding notifications 
The purpose of the notification policy is to inform key IT support staff and 
customers about incidents that have caused a service disruption. 
Notifications from the application are automated and driven by events of the 
application. There might be some circumstances when you must manually 
send a notification. 
Automated notifications are sent to individuals or groups, such as when an 
incident is created, assigned, or resolved. If you are using SLM, escalating 
notifications can be sent, as described in “Notifications defined in SLM” on 
page 161. 
Individual and system-wide preferences indicate whether to send 
notifications by alert, email, or pager. The administrator can configure the 
notification method, as to whether business hours and holidays are 
respected, and whether to send individual or group notifications. For details 
on configuration, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 
Configuration Guide. 
160 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
User’s Guide 
The following scenarios are examples of notifications sent from Incident 
Management: 
! Customers are notified by email when the incident is resolved. The email 
Understanding notifications ! 161 
includes the resolution. 
! The incident owner is notified when an incident is resolved, if the assignee 
group is different from the owner group. 
! The Problem assignment group or assignee is notified when a solution 
entry is created from an incident. 
Assignees of incidents related to problem investigations, known errors, and 
change requests can receive notification from Problem Management or 
Change Management. See the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem 
Management 7.0 User’s Guide and BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 
User’s Guide for details. 
Notifications 
defined in SLM 
Notifications can also be sent out based on milestone actions that are defined 
as part of service targets in the SLM application. Service target escalations 
occur when the incident’s responded date is in danger of breaching the 
service terms. For example, this happens when: 
! The target response time has elapsed and the incident is still assigned. 
! The target resolution time has elapsed and the incident is still open (not 
resolved, closed, or canceled). 
You can view the Responded Date on the Date/System tab. For details on 
service target calculations, see “Understanding SLM calculations” on 
page 160. 
You can configure SLM to send notifications to incident assignees, assignee 
group managers, incident owners, or owner group managers by using 
templates included with the Incident Management integration with SLM. 
For details on configuring service targets and notifications in SLM, see the 
BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User’s Guide.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Viewing the audit log 
You can view field changes and notifications for the incident. The application 
generates an audit entry when notifications are sent, and also when the 
record is modified; it creates an audit entry for each field and relationship 
that is modified. The Login ID of the individual making the change appears 
next to the audit entry. 
" To view the audit log 
1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is 
not selected. 
2 Open an incident. 
3 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > View Audit Log. 
The Incident Audit Log dialog box appears. Changes to fields appear on the 
Form Audits tab. 
Figure 5-6: Incident Audit Log dialog box 
4 To filter the list, select the appropriate audit type. 
The Audit Type list provides selections for fields, such as Status, and groups 
of related fields, such as Key Dates. The filter displays audit records for 
changes to the selected field or fields. 
5 To see notifications, click the Notification Audits tab. 
All notifications that are sent from an incident are audited. The notifications 
appear on the Notification Audits tab. 
162 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
Chapter 6 Managing configuration items 
A configuration item (CI) is any component of an infrastructure, for example, 
hardware or software components, a service, an inventory location, a 
network (LAN or WAN), and so on. 
You can use the information in CIs to diagnose user problems or to 
determine if a change to a CI or the IT infrastructure must be made. For 
example, if a user calls in with a printing problem, a staff member can check 
to see if the printer (CI) is down or in repair. 
To record information against CIs, such as CI unavailability or relating an 
incident to a CI, the CI must be recorded in the CMDB. If you do not have 
BMC Remedy Asset Management, then Incident Management provides 
limited ability to manage CIs and inventory. 
Note: This functionality is available whether or not BMC Remedy Asset 
Management is installed. If you have BMC Remedy Asset Management, 
you have access to additional functionality, as described in BMC Remedy 
Asset Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 
Managing configuration items ! 163 
The following topics are provided: 
! Creating a CI (page 164) 
! Managing inventory (page 170)
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Creating a CI 
To create a CI, you must have Asset Admin permission. If you have Asset 
User permission and you need to modify a CI, your administrator must open 
the appropriate CI, and then relate your support group to the CI. 
The fields on the CI form vary with the CI type. This section provides 
examples of creating three types of CIs: 
! “Creating a computer system CI” on page 164 
! “Creating a bulk inventory CI” on page 167 
! “Creating an inventory location CI” on page 169 
Creating a computer system CI 
The following procedure is an example of creating a computer system CI. For 
creating other types of CIs, the general procedure is similar, with the 
exception of specific fields on the CI form. 
" To create a computer system CI 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Manage CIs. 
The Select a CI Type dialog box appears. 
Figure 6-1: Select a CI Type dialog box 
2 From the CI Type list, select System > Computer System. 
3 Click Create. 
The Computer System form appears. 
164 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
User’s Guide 
Creating a CI ! 165 
Figure 6-2: Completed Computer System form 
4 In the CI Name field, type a name for the CI. 
When creating a CI name, you should follow a consistent naming 
convention. According to ITIL guidelines, identifiers should be short but 
meaningful, and for hardware, not based on supplier device names. For 
example, the name could include an indicator of the CI’s function (such as 
“Workstation” or “Monitor”) followed by a numeric code, such as 
MONITOR100. 
5 In the CI ID field, type a unique alphanumeric value for the CI. 
6 Specify whether the CI is supported by selecting Yes or No from the 
Supported list. 
7 Select the company to which this CI belongs. 
8 From the Primary Capability and Capability lists, select the roles this CI 
performs in your company’s topology. 
9 Select a status from the Status list.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
The default value is Ordered. You can select one of the following options. 
Status Description 
Received The CI was received in shipping. 
Being Assembled The CI is being assembled. 
Deployed The CI was installed. 
In Repair The CI is down for maintenance. 
Down The CI is down, but not yet in maintenance. 
End of Life The CI is no longer being deployed. 
Transferred The CI was transferred to another location. 
Delete The CI is marked for deletion. You must be a member of the 
APP-Management or APP-Administrator group to mark a CI 
for deletion. 
In Inventory The CI is in inventory but not yet deployed. When you select this 
status, you are prompted to select the inventory location. 
On Loan The CI is on loan to another location. 
Disposed The CI is no longer available and was disposed of. 
Reserved The CI was reserved and taken out of inventory. 
Return to 
Vendor 
The CI must be returned to the vendor as damaged or 
unwanted. 
10 Select what impact or urgency this CI will have if it goes down. 
11 In the Users Affected field, specify the number of people who use this CI or 
will be affected if it goes down. 
12 Complete the other fields in this area. 
Field name Description 
Tag Number The CI tag number. This is the number 
166 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items 
usually placed on the product by a 
member of your IT department to track 
the CI. 
Serial Number The CI serial number. 
Part Number The CI part number.
User’s Guide 
Field name Description 
System Role The role this CI plays in your company. 
Status Reason The reason this CI has the status it does. 
13 Click the General tab. 
14 Categorize your CI using the lists and fields in the Product Categorization 
Creating a CI ! 167 
area. 
15 Specify the location of the CI using the lists and fields in the Location area. 
16 Enter the dates of the CI in the Lifecycle area. 
17 Click the Specifications tab. 
18 Add additional information about the CI. 
19 Click Save. 
Creating a bulk inventory CI 
Use the following procedure to create bulk inventory CIs. 
" To create a bulk inventory CI 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Manage CIs. 
The Manage CI Information dialog box appears. 
2 From the CI Type list, select Inventory > Bulk Inventory, and click Create. 
The Bulk Inventory form appears.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Figure 6-3: Completed Bulk Inventory form 
3 Complete the following required fields. 
Field name Description 
CI Name Enter the name of the bulk inventory 
4 Click Save. 
168 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items 
item, for example, Microsoft Windows 
XP. 
Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 Categorize the item. 
Received Quantity Enter the number of items received.
User’s Guide 
Creating a CI ! 169 
Creating an inventory location CI 
The following procedure uses the example of creating a location CI. Location 
CIs can be used when managing inventory. Use them to indicate where bulk 
inventory and other CIs are located. 
" To create a location CI 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Manage CIs. 
The Manage CI Information dialog box appears. 
2 From the Type list, select System > Inventory Location, and click Create. 
The Inventory Location form appears. 
Figure 6-4: Completed Inventory Location form 
3 In the CI Name field, enter the location name. 
4 Complete the other, optional fields. 
5 Click Save.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Managing inventory 
You can use the Manage Inventory function to track bulk inventory items 
and other CIs that are available for deployment. 
Before you can track inventory, you must: 
! Create inventory location CIs. 
! Create bulk inventory CIs, or other CIs to be tracked as inventory. 
! For bulk inventory, specify the received quantity and the inventory 
locations. 
! For non-bulk inventory CIs, set the inventory status to In Inventory, and 
select a location. 
Note: For instructions on creating CIs, see “Creating a CI” on page 164. 
After items are in inventory, you can use the Manage Inventory function to 
view, relocate, and reserve and use CIs and bulk inventory items. 
Viewing inventory locations 
You can view the location of inventory from the Manage Inventory dialog 
box. 
" To view inventory locations 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Manage Inventory. 
The Manage Inventory dialog box appears. 
170 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
User’s Guide 
Figure 6-5: Search results in the Manage Inventory dialog box 
Managing inventory ! 171 
2 Enter your search criteria, and click Search. 
Results matching your search criteria appear in the table. 
3 Select a CI or bulk inventory item from the table, and click View Location. 
The Inventory Location form appears. 
Figure 6-6: Inventory Location form
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
4 View the CIs in the inventory. 
5 Click Close. 
Relocating CIs 
You can relocate CIs or bulk inventory items from one location to another. 
" To relocate assets 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Manage Inventory. 
The Manage Inventory dialog box appears. 
2 Search for inventory in the current location. 
3 Select the CI or bulk inventory item you want to relocate, and click Relocate 
CIs. 
The Search Inventory Locations dialog box appears. 
Figure 6-7: Search Inventory Locations dialog box displaying results 
4 For the location where you want to relocate the CI, specify search criteria, 
and click Search. 
Results matching your search criteria appear in the table. 
5 Select the location where you want to relocate your CI. 
172 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
User’s Guide 
6 In the Quantity field, enter the number of CIs you want to relocate. 
7 Click Relocate. 
Managing inventory ! 173 
Reserving and using inventory 
You can reserve and use the CIs and bulk inventory items that are in 
inventory. 
" To reserve and use inventory 
1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose 
General Functions > Manage Inventory. 
The Manage Inventory dialog box appears. 
2 Select the CI or bulk inventory item you want to reserve and use. 
3 Click in the Transaction Qty column and enter the number of assets or bulk 
inventory items you want to use. 
Figure 6-8: Manage Inventory dialog box with transaction quantity 
4 Click Reserve/Use Inventory. 
The number of CIs or bulk inventory items in the Qty in Stock column is 
reduced by the number reserved and used. 
Enter the number of 
assets you want to 
use, and click 
Reserve/Use 
Inventory.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
174 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
Glossary ! 175 
Glossary 
This glossary contains terms for all of the 
ITSM applications. 
For a list of AR System terms, see the glossary 
in BMC Remedy Action Request System 7.0 
Concepts guide. 
For a list of CMDB terms, see the glossary in 
BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Concepts and Best 
Practices Guide. 
accelerated depreciation 
Any method of depreciation that allows 
greater deductions in the earlier years of a 
CI’s life cycle. See also depreciation and 
configuration item (CI). 
access permission 
See permission group. 
action 
A mechanism, such as an alert or a Set Fields 
action, for making sure that SLM 
commitments are met. You can define one 
or more actions that will be associated with 
a milestone. 
administrator 
See application administrator. 
Administration console 
See Application Administration console. 
agreement 
A documented understanding between two 
parties. An agreement can be one of three 
types: service level agreement, operational 
level agreement, or underpinning contract. 
See also service level agreement (SLA), 
operational level agreement (OLA), and 
underpinning contract (UC). 
agreement owners 
A feature that allows you to select which 
individuals or groups of people to notify at 
certain times, for example, when an SLA is 
at risk or when an SLA is going to expire. 
application administrator 
An individual responsible for the 
management of the ITSM applications, 
including setting up forms, setting access 
rights for users, and creating 
configurations.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
Application Administration console 
The main interface for configuring ITSM 
applications. The console works like a 
control panel from which administrators 
can perform common configuration 
activities and activities specific to different 
ITSM applications and subsystems. 
approval 
A process that generates electronic 
signature lines for items that require 
approval, and tracks who has approved or 
rejected a given request. 
asset manager 
The manager responsible for both strategy 
and day-to-day CI management functions, 
for example, updating CIs and 
configurations, running reports, or 
negotiating contracts. 
assignee 
The person assigned the responsibility of 
working on any of the following activities: 
change request, incident ticket, problem 
investigation, known error, solution 
database entry, and so on. 
assignment 
Automatically or manually assigning a 
group or individual the responsibility of 
resolving an issue or request. ITSM 
applications use the Assignment form for 
group automatic assignment and the 
Assignment Engine for individual 
automatic assignment. 
audit schedule 
A schedule used to perform periodic audits 
that check for differences between the 
information in the CI database and the CIs 
that are deployed in the company. 
176 "Glossary 
availability service target 
A service target that measures the time that 
an asset or service is available or 
unavailable. This service target applies 
specifically to data that is tracked in an 
application based on AR System, such as 
Asset Management. 
BMC Atrium Configuration Management 
Database (BMC Atrium CMDB) 
An infrastructure built on AR System and 
used to build data models and define 
datasets. 
book value 
The value of a CI equal to the purchase cost 
minus the accumulated depreciation. 
broadcast message 
An application feature that enables users to 
create messages that can be viewed by the 
entire organization or by users in specific 
groups. 
BSM 
See business service management (BSM). 
bulk inventory 
Assets that you order in quantity, such as 
power cables. 
bulk items 
Items that are not tracked by an individual 
record for each unit. Bulk items in 
inventory are tracked by quantities of an 
item type. For example, items such as cables 
do not require individual records but 
rather, one record for a bulk quantity of the 
specific cable type. 
Bulk Performance Manager Node 
A feature that allows the administrator to 
add multiple nodes to a service target at one 
time. This feature is specific to collection 
nodes for BMC Performance Manager. See 
also collection node.
User’s Guide 
Glossary ! 177 
business service management (BSM) 
A flexible, comprehensive management 
approach that links IT resources and 
business objectives. BSM makes sure that 
everything IT does is prioritized according 
to business impact, and enables IT 
organizations to proactively address 
business requirements. 
CAB 
See change advisory board (CAB) 
CCM 
See Change and Configuration Management. 
change advisory board (CAB) 
A group that advises change management 
on the implementation of significant 
changes to the IT infrastructure. This group 
is often made up of representatives from 
various IT areas and business units. 
Change and Configuration Management 
An application feature that proactively 
manages both IT and business-driven 
changes, and protects the IT environment. 
It does this by using planning and 
decision-making data contained in a 
dedicated BMC Atrium CMDB. 
change authority 
The name of a group with the authority to 
approve changes. This group can also be 
called the Change Advisory Board. See also 
change advisory board (CAB). 
change management 
As a concept, the process of planning, 
scheduling, implementing, and tracking 
changes to the IT infrastructure, or any 
other aspect of service, in a controlled 
manner. By using change management, you 
can implement approved changes with 
minimal disruption to the business 
environment. 
change manager 
A person responsible for filtering, 
accepting, and classifying all change 
requests. The change manager is also 
responsible for planning and coordinating 
the implementation of the changes. 
Sometimes known as a change supervisor. 
change request 
The controlled process for the addition, 
modification, or removal of approved, 
supported, or baselined hardware, 
networks, software, applications, 
environments, or systems. A change request 
can involve multiple change activities. 
charge-back 
The process of charging departments or 
cost centers for the IT infrastructure 
required to support their business 
processes. 
charge-back invoice 
A detailed list of charges to cost centers, 
including any charge-back percentage. 
charge-back percentage 
A percentage used to calculate charge-back 
costs. 
charge-back report 
A report used by a cost manager to track 
information and find entries that might 
need to be adjusted. 
charge-back summary 
The total charges made to cost centers, 
including charge-back percentage. For split 
cost centers, it also provides information 
about how charges are allocated for source 
cost centers and target cost centers. 
CI 
See configuration item (CI).
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
CI browser 
A component of ITSM. The CI browser lets 
you search for and view CIs and their 
relationships. 
CI unavailability 
The downtime of a CI. 
CI unavailability record 
The time when a CI is either partially or 
completely unavailable to perform its 
required function. CI unavailability records 
can be broadcast or related to other records. 
class 
Metadata in the BMC Atrium CMDB that 
defines a type of object, usually a 
configuration item (CI) or relationship. 
client tier 
The architecture level where AR System 
clients operate within the multitier system. 
CMDB 
See BMC Atrium Configuration 
Management Database (BMC Atrium 
CMDB). 
Reconciliation Engine 
A component of the BMC Atrium CMDB. 
The Reconciliation Engine merges data 
from different discovery services based on 
identification and precedence rules. 
collection node 
The data source for the information that is 
forwarded to the collection points. Some 
examples of data sources are BMC 
Performance Manager Classic, BMC 
Performance Manager Express, BMC 
Application Response Time, and SNMP 
data sources. 
178 "Glossary 
collection point 
The component in the SLM application that 
is responsible for collecting the data. You 
can add multiple collection points with 
different port numbers. 
collector 
The component in the SLM application that 
manages the collection points and retrieves 
data. 
Company field 
A field in ITSM that controls 
multi-tenancy. It shows only data for the 
companies for which you have permission. 
See also multi-tenancy. 
compliance at risk target 
A target (such as 99.5 percent) that 
identifies when the agreement's compliance 
reaches a point that is nearing a breach state 
and should be identified as a potential risk. 
See also compliance-only service target and 
compliance service target. 
compliance-only service target 
A service target that enables you to access 
data already processed by another product 
for use in compliance calculations. Using 
the compliance-only service target, SLM 
calculates compliance results at the 
agreement level only, by accessing service 
target results that were already processed by 
another application. See also compliance at 
risk target and compliance service target. 
compliance service target 
A target (such as 99 percent) that tracks the 
performance of the agreement to see the 
percentage of time the agreement was met 
over specific time periods. See also 
compliance at risk target and 
compliance-only service target.
User’s Guide 
Glossary ! 179 
configuration 
Sets of CIs that are required by different 
groups of people in the company. 
configuration catalog 
A feature of Asset Management that stores 
your standard configurations (such as a 
standard desktop, laptop, server, and so on) 
for management purposes. 
configuration item (CI) 
An infrastructure component or an item 
associated with the infrastructure that is (or 
will be) under the control of configuration 
management, for example, a Request for 
Change. A CI can be complex or simple, 
large or small. CIs can include entire 
systems or be a single module or minor 
component. CIs can also include records of 
people (users and customers) and locations. 
configuration management 
The process of maintaining detailed IT 
inventory records. It involves identifying 
and defining the CIs in a system, recording 
and reporting the status of all CIs and 
requests for change, and verifying the 
completeness and correctness of all CIs. See 
also configuration item (CI). 
Configuration Management Database 
See BMC Atrium Configuration 
Management Database (BMC Atrium 
CMDB). 
contract 
A documented relationship between two 
parties that identifies details about each 
party, accounting and budget codes, 
purchase cost, and expiration dates, and ties 
one or more SLAs, OLAs, or underpinning 
contracts to the interested parties. The 
contract also makes it possible to segment 
and restrict access to the compliance and 
service target results so that results can be 
viewed by contract. 
cost center 
An entity tracking cost information within 
an organization. See also split cost center. 
cost management 
All of the policies, procedures, and 
deliverables required to fulfil an 
organization’s costing and charging 
requirements. 
currency code 
The three-letter code that represents a 
currency type, such as USD for United States 
Dollars. 
dashboard 
Web-based, graphical user interface using 
flashboards where compliance and service 
target results can be viewed by service level 
managers, service delivery managers, other 
IT professionals, and customers or line of 
business owners. See also service level 
agreement (SLA), service target, and 
flashboard. 
data consumer 
An application that works with data in 
ITSM. It might view the data or modify it. 
See also data provider.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
data provider 
An application that loads data into ITSM. 
This is often a discovery application. See 
also data consumer. 
dataset 
A logical group of data in ITSM. A dataset 
can represent data from a particular source, 
a snapshot from a particular date, and so 
on. The dataset used by BMC products for 
reconciled production data is named BMC 
Asset. 
decision tree 
A step-by-step guide set up by an 
administrator. It guides the user through a 
questionnaire and, based on the user’s 
answers, completes part of the form for a 
new incident. 
declining balance depreciation 
A method of calculating depreciation in 
which CIs depreciate at a constant rate per 
year, accelerated by a factor of 150 percent. 
In this method of accelerated depreciation, 
150 percent of the straight-line depreciation 
amount is taken the first year, and then that 
same percentage is applied to the 
undepreciated amount in subsequent years. 
See also double-declining balance 
depreciation. 
definitive software library (DSL) 
A central repository of approved product 
dictionary entries (PDEs). See also product 
dictionary entry (PDE). 
dependent change request 
A change request that must be completed in 
sequence, as defined by the change 
manager. 
depreciation 
The loss of an asset’s value resulting from 
the passage of time. 
180 "Glossary 
double-declining balance depreciation 
A method of calculating depreciation in 
which CIs depreciate at a constant rate per 
year, accelerated by a factor of 200 percent. 
In this method of accelerated depreciation, 
double the straight-line depreciation 
amount is taken the first year, and then that 
same percentage is applied to the 
undepreciated amount in subsequent years. 
See also declining balance depreciation. 
down CI 
A CI out of service for repairs or not 
working. 
DSL 
See definitive software library (DSL). 
escalation 
A workflow component that searches at 
specified times or at regular intervals for 
requests matching a specified condition, 
and performs specified operations on all 
matching requests. Escalations are generally 
used to find records that have exceeded 
desired business rules or processes, and take 
appropriate action. They run on the 
AR System server. 
federated data 
Data linked from a CI in ITSM but stored 
externally. Federated data might represent 
more attributes of the CI or related 
information, such as change requests on the 
CI. 
flashboard 
A real-time visual monitoring tool that 
shows you the state of your service 
operations, warns you about potential 
problems, and collects and shows trend 
data.
User’s Guide 
Glossary ! 181 
form 
A collection of fields that represents a 
record of information in the AR System. 
AR System administrators can define and 
change the fields and workflow associated 
with a form. An AR System application can 
include many forms. 
functional role 
A defined role used for notifications and to 
extend access granted by permission 
groups. 
global 
A setting that applies changes or defines 
certain parameters for all companies in a 
multi-tenancy environment. See also 
multi-tenancy. 
goal 
Measurement method that allows you to 
track the time taken to resolve an issue or 
track how often an asset or service was 
available. Goals are used to determine 
whether service targets are met. 
guest user 
Users who have not been configured with 
login information in the People form. Guest 
users cannot create change requests. 
impacted area 
Companies, locations, or organizations 
affected by changes or updates to CIs. 
incident 
Any event that is not part of the standard 
operation of a service and that causes an 
interruption to or reduction in the quality 
of that service. See also incident 
management and problem investigation. 
incident management 
As a concept, a reactive process typically 
initiated in response to a customer’s call. 
The primary goal of the incident 
management process is to restore normal 
service operation as quickly as possible and 
with minimum disruption to the business. 
incident manager 
A person who monitors incident tickets and 
activities to help plan resources and to 
identify incident trends. The incident 
manager also handles assignments. 
incident matching 
A search process in Incident Management 
that can be used to search for other 
incidents, problem investigations, known 
errors, and solution database entries that 
share some of the same characteristics as the 
current incident, such as product 
categorization. 
incident owner 
The user who records the incident. This 
user might differ from the current incident 
assignee. See also assignee. 
Information Technology Infrastructure Library 
(ITIL) 
A set of guidelines for the management and 
provision of operational IT services. 
instance 
A record in ITSM. An instance is an object 
of a particular class. Both CIs and 
relationships are considered instances. 
inventory 
The quantity of CIs available. 
ISO currency code 
See currency code. 
ITIL 
See Information Technology Infrastructure 
Library (ITIL).
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
key performance indicator (KPI) 
A data point used to measure whether 
performance-monitoring service targets 
meet their goals. See also service level 
agreement (SLA). 
known error 
A problem that has been successfully 
diagnosed and for which a temporary 
work-around or permanent solution to the 
known error has been identified. See also 
problem and work-around. 
KPI 
See key performance indicator (KPI). 
life cycle asset management 
Managing the life of a CI through its 
purchase, deployment, and disposal. 
maintenance schedule 
A schedule used to perform maintenance 
on CIs. 
measurement 
The metric by which supervisors measure 
the ability of the support staff to meet their 
agreements. 
milestone 
A point in time that triggers a set of actions 
as you progress toward an agreement 
compliance target or service target goal. The 
triggered actions are to make sure your 
goals are being met. 
multi-tenancy 
A feature in ITSM that uses the Company 
field to limit access by individuals. The 
Company field can be used to represent a 
company, department, or other group. The 
Company field also can be used to control 
access in a hosted environment. By default, 
ITSM applications operate in multi-tenancy 
mode. See also single-tenancy. 
182 "Glossary 
navigation pane 
An area on the left side of consoles that 
provides links to functionality and links to 
other programs. 
New Request Wizard 
A simple form for requesters to submit 
service requests. Requesters use the New 
Request Wizard interface to submit service 
requests to IT, which is the only way to 
submit a service request from the Requester 
console. 
non-bulk CIs 
Stand-alone configuration items, for 
example, a single server or laptop. 
notification 
A message sent to a user by workflow. 
Notification can be in the form of an alert, 
email message, or other method using 
integrations. 
OLA 
See operational level agreement (OLA). 
operational catalog 
A feature in which operational categories 
for service requests are defined. 
operational categorization 
A three-tier hierarchical representation of 
operations as defined in the Operational 
Catalog configuration form. This 
categorization is included in records to 
specify the range of operations to which a 
record applies. 
operational level agreement (OLA) 
An internal agreement used to define and 
track the level of service provided for an IT 
organization. An example is an agreement 
between the network management team 
and the service desk.
User’s Guide 
Glossary ! 183 
operator 
One of a number of functions that enable 
you to define advanced searches or build 
qualifications. 
Overview console 
A central console for ITSM applications. 
The console works like a control panel from 
which users can access all assigned work and 
perform their primary activities. 
parent/child contract 
A parent, or main, contract that has other 
children, or subcontracts, associated with it. 
PDE 
See product dictionary entry (PDE). 
peer change request 
A dependent change request that can be 
completed at the same time as another 
change request. 
peer-to-peer 
Devices that are on the same level in an 
organization’s network (for example, two 
workstations). See also notification. 
performance-level service target 
A service target that compares a service level 
to the goals defined in the service target to 
determine whether the goal is met. Allows 
you to monitor whether a critical 
application that you are using has 
responded within the time period specified 
in the goals. See also goal. 
performance-monitoring service target 
A service target that compares a goal to a 
defined threshold to determine if the goal is 
met. For example, it allows you to monitor 
whether a critical application that you are 
using responds within 4 seconds or if the 
application meets other criteria such as 
being in a state of “OK.” 
permission group 
A feature of the ITSM applications that 
controls what areas of the application a 
users can access. Each permission group can 
access only certain areas of the application. 
A user can belong to more than one 
permission group. 
problem 
The root cause of an incident or potential 
incident. After a resolution or work-around 
is identified, the problem becomes a 
solution database entry or known error. See 
also incident, known error, solution database, 
and work-around. 
problem investigation 
A process that helps an IT organization 
diagnose the root cause of incidents and 
potential incidents. It initiates actions that 
help to improve or correct the situation, 
preventing the incident from recurring. 
problem management 
As a concept, a process that identifies the 
cause of problems and initiates actions that 
help to improve or correct the situation, 
preventing an incident from recurring or 
occurring in the first place. The cause 
identified by a problem investigation can be 
documented in a known error or solution 
database record. See also incident, known 
error, solution database, and problem. 
problem manager 
A person who reviews problem 
investigations and known errors to 
maintain the quality and integrity of the 
problem management process. This person 
coordinates the assignment of problem 
investigations and known errors to support 
staff, and also reviews problem 
investigation requests and performs 
business impact analysis.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
process flow 
Shows the progress of a request as it moves 
through the stages of its life cycle. It does 
this within a form, such as an incident 
request. A diagram shows the stages of the 
process, as indicated by best practices, 
rooted in ITIL processes. It indicates the 
current stage and state of the request. The 
process flow diagram also serves as a wizard, 
guiding the user through the life cycle. 
product categorization 
A five-tier hierarchical representation of 
products as defined in the Product Catalog 
configuration form. This categorization is 
included in records to specify the range of 
products to which the record applies. 
product dictionary entry (PDE) 
An entry in the Definitive Software Library 
that represents the master name of a 
software application. See also definitive 
software library (DSL). 
push field 
An advanced action that allows you to push 
information from the “Applies To” form 
for which you are creating an SLA to 
another form on the same server. See also 
service level agreement (SLA). 
reconciliation 
A feature in Asset Management that checks 
for duplicate CI records and enables the 
user to delete one and keep the other. 
registered user 
A user who has an entry in the People form 
with an AR System login ID. 
relationship 
A type of BMC Atrium CMDB class that 
defines the relationship between two CIs. 
184 "Glossary 
reminder 
A message similar to an AR System 
notification, except that you can define the 
content of a reminder and specify when to 
send it. 
request-based service target 
A service target that measures how long a 
process takes, such as the time to respond to 
or resolve a service desk request, or the time 
to respond to or resolve a change request. 
requester 
A person in the organization who needs 
assistance from the IT support staff. A 
requester is usually an employee in the 
organization who needs to have a change 
implemented or an incident resolved. 
Requester console 
The front end for the Change Management 
and Incident Management applications. It 
provides an easy, user-friendly interface 
that allows users to quickly submit requests 
for change or incidents to the two back-end 
applications, and to view their submitted 
requests. 
residual value 
The value you can purchase an item for 
after its lease expires. 
return on investment (ROI) 
A method of calculating when the capital 
cost of implementing a project, product, or 
service will be recovered through the 
savings that result from completing the 
activity. The ROI can be expressed in terms 
of internal savings, increased revenue from 
external sources, or some combination of 
these types of savings. See also service level 
agreement (SLA) and service level 
management (SLM).
User’s Guide 
Glossary ! 185 
review period 
A period of time over which the compliance 
of an agreement is monitored on a regular 
basis. The following review periods are 
provided in SLM: Daily, Weekly, Monthly, 
and Quarterly. For example, if a Monthly 
review period is added to a service level 
agreement, then the SLA's compliance 
target needs to be met on a monthly basis. If 
a Daily review period is also added, then the 
SLA's compliance target needs to be met on 
both a daily basis and a monthly basis. See 
also service level agreement (SLA) and service 
level management (SLM). 
ROI 
See return on investment (ROI). 
role 
A set of responsibilities, activities, and 
authorizations, usually within the context 
of a single application or a business system. 
Note: Access to Remedy ITSM applications 
is based on user roles. Depending on your 
role in the organization—requester, 
support, management—you work with a 
different application (or view) on your 
desktop. 
root cause 
The underlying cause of an IT-related 
problem experienced by a customer. 
row level locking 
See multi-tenancy. 
salvage value 
The estimated value that a CI will realize at 
the end of its useful life. See also useful life. 
script 
Detailed instructions that have been set up 
by an administrator to prompt users with 
questions that can assist in resolving or 
assigning an incident. 
service catalog 
A list of IT services, default levels, and 
options. 
service level agreement (SLA) 
An agreement between a service provider 
and its customers or lines of business that 
formally documents the needs of the 
customer and makes sure the correct level 
of service is received from the service 
provider. 
service level management (SLM) 
As a concept, the continuous and proactive 
process of defining, agreeing, monitoring, 
reporting, and reviewing the performance 
of IT services to make sure that adequate 
levels of service are delivered in alignment 
with business needs and at acceptable cost. 
service manager 
A manager who uses Asset Management to 
create service objects used for interpreting 
business problems, for example, cost of 
unavailability of services to a business area. 
service request 
A request for service to the IT organization. 
Service requests can be requests for change 
or requests to resolve incidents that impact 
the user. 
Service Request console 
See Requester console.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
service target 
The individual level of service to achieve. A 
service target includes terms and 
conditions, goals, costs, and milestones. 
Examples of service target goals include 
incident resolution time of 30 minutes, 
application response time of 4 seconds, and 
an application being in a state of “OK.” See 
also availability service target, 
performance-monitoring service target, 
request-based service target, and compliance 
service target. 
set field 
An advanced action that allows you to pull 
information from other forms to set in the 
form for which you are creating the 
agreement. 
single-tenancy 
A feature that allows selection of a default 
company for company fields in ITSM. 
Single-tenancy mode is required to give 
unknown users access to the ITSM 
Requester console. See also multi-tenancy. 
SLI 
See software library item (SLI). 
SLM 
See service level management (SLM). 
software library item (SLI) 
The physical storage locations of the master 
copy of a software application and its 
versions. 
software license compliance 
Keeping track of what software your 
company has and that it has the legal right 
to use it. 
solution database 
A repository that stores reusable solutions 
to customer product problems in an 
easy-to-retrieve format. 
186 "Glossary 
solution entry 
A reusable solution to a customer product 
problem. This is stored in the solution 
database. 
split cost center 
A cost center that enables a department to 
split its costs with other departments. For 
example, a project management group 
might split its costs with an engineering 
department and a sales department. The 
project management department would be 
a split cost center, and the engineering 
department and sales department would be 
target cost centers. 
straight-line depreciation 
A method of calculating depreciation in 
which CIs depreciate at a constant value per 
year. The annual depreciation is calculated 
by subtracting the salvage value of the CI 
from the purchase price and then dividing 
this number by the estimated useful life of 
the CI. 
submitter 
A person who reports a problem, makes a 
request, or enters information into a 
database. See also change request. 
submitter group 
One of several special access control groups 
that the AR System provides. Users 
automatically belong to this implicit group 
for requests they have submitted. See also 
assignee. 
sum-of-the-year’s digits depreciation 
A method of calculating depreciation in 
which CIs lose more of their value early in 
their lifetime. This method of calculating 
depreciation of a CI assumes higher 
depreciation charges and greater tax 
benefits in the early years of a CI's life.
User’s Guide 
Glossary ! 187 
task 
A unit of work that needs to be completed as 
a step in implementing an incident or 
problem investigation. In the Change 
Management application, you can also 
group a number of activities for requests 
with a number of actions that need to be 
completed before the request can be 
resolved. Your administrator creates task 
templates and task group templates that you 
can reuse for the same types of requests. 
Tasks can be manual or automatic. 
task management system (TMS) 
A sub-system that is used to create task 
templates and task group templates. Besides 
the ability to set up predecessor-successor 
relationships, TMS supports branching and 
multiple task paths as well as the data 
exchange between activities. 
TCO 
See total cost of ownership (TCO). 
template 
1. A set of predefined criteria or settings that 
can be used by many agreements or service 
targets. See also service level agreement 
(SLA). 
2. A form set up by an administrator that a 
user can select to complete an incident 
ticket or a change request with information 
consistent with the user’s support group 
and the type of incident or change request. 
terms and conditions 
The conditions that specify whether a 
service target should take effect. For 
example, the terms and conditions could 
specify that the service target applies only to 
incidents in which the priority is urgent and 
the service is email. Or the service target 
applies only to a specific set of KPIs. See also 
service target. 
time-based service target 
A service target that measures the time 
taken, for example, to resolve an incident 
from the time the incident was reported to 
the time it was resolved. Any time that falls 
within the “Exclude when” qualification is 
ignored and not measured. 
TMS 
See task management system (TMS). 
topology 
The pattern of links connecting pairs of 
nodes of a network. 
total cost of ownership (TCO) 
A method of calculating all expenses 
associated with a CI over its lifetime. The 
calculation considers depreciation, 
maintenance, staff costs, accommodation, 
and planned renewal. 
UC 
See underpinning contract (UC). 
underpinning contract (UC) 
A contract that is used to track performance 
against prearranged goals that the IT 
organization has with an external service 
provider or supplier. 
useful life 
The number of years that a depreciable CI is 
expected to be in use. 
wildcard 
A character that users can type to represent 
other characters in a search. For example, in 
search statements in character fields, users 
can specify wildcards to match single 
characters, strings, or characters within a 
range or set. 
work info 
A record describing work performed.
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
work-around 
A temporary resolution to an incident, 
problem, or known error. 
workflow 
The automated set of business processes 
used to run a company. 
188 "Glossary
Index ! 189 
Index 
A 
accelerators for process flows, best practice 24 
ad hoc requests 82 
adding 
customer profiles 117 
work information 51 
advanced qualifications, using to generate 
reports 69 
Advanced Search, using to find records 40 
answers. See solutions 
application preferences, setting 106–108 
Asset Management, about 11 
Assigned Work area 
about 32 
defined 104 
filtering 105, 121 
refreshing 35 
assigning 
incidents 156 
tasks 129 
assignment log 
about 158 
deleting 123 
assignments 
See also incidents 
about 120–132 
accepting 122 
incidents, reassigning 124 
incidents, viewing 121 
logged 158 
assignments (continued) 
managing 155–159 
receiving notification of 121 
recording time worked 122 
vendors 126 
working with 121–123 
associations. See relationships 
Atrium CMDB. See CMDB 
audience 13 
audit log, viewing 162 
auto-filling fields 38 
B 
Best Practice icon 10 
best practices 
CI naming conventions 165 
retrying events in order 98 
using CIs to diagnose user problems 163 
using process flow accelerators 24 
BMC Atrium CMDB. See CMDB 
BMC Remedy User, opening Incident 
Management console with 28 
Broadcast area, defined 104 
broadcasts 
creating 55 
limiting 59 
location in Overview console 36 
viewing 58, 102
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
browsers 
entering main console URL 77 
using to open Incident Management 
console 30 
bulk inventory CI 167 
Bulk Inventory form 168 
bulletin board messages. See broadcasts 
Bulletin Board. See broadcasts 
C 
calculations 160 
canceling service requests 87 
categorization, defined 20 
Change Management 
about 11 
creating changes from incidents 146 
requester role 74 
Change Request Information form 146 
CIs 
bulk inventory example 167 
computer system example 164 
creating 164–169 
inventory location example 169 
naming conventions, best practice 165 
problem diagnosis and, best practice 163 
recording unavailability 116 
relocating 172 
status 165 
closing incidents 147 
CMDB, about 10 
colors of service targets, explained 134 
Command Event Master permission 97 
computer system CI 164 
Computer System form 165 
Configuration Item Unavailability form 117 
consoles 
changing view of 36 
Incident Management 
Manager Console tab 154–155 
Support Console tab 104–105 
Overview 31 
Report 66 
Requester 76 
copying relationships 46 
Costs form 140 
190 "Index 
costs, recording 139–141 
Create Incident form 110 
creating 
broadcasts 55 
CIs 164–169 
customer profiles 117 
incident records 108–112 
infrastructure change from incidents 146 
known errors from incidents 149 
problem investigations from incidents 144 
records 34 
reminders 53–55 
service requests 80 
solution entries from incidents 150 
tasks 127–129 
customer profiles 
adding 117 
modifying 119 
D 
decision trees 
defined 20 
using 114 
defining relationships 43 
diagnosing incidents 132 
documents available for ITSM 13–16 
duplicating incidents 114 
E 
email, sending messages about CIs with 63–65 
enhanced problem management, defined 20 
errors, known, creating 149 
event logs, viewing 97 
F 
features, new 18–21 
Flashboards area, defined 154 
forms 
Bulk Inventory 168 
Change Request Information 146 
Computer System 165 
Configuration Item Unavailability 117 
Costs 140 
Incident Creation 110 
Inventory Location 169, 171
User’s Guide 
Index ! 191 
forms (continued) 
Known Error 149 
Modify Incident 138, 141 
New/Modify Broadcasts 56 
People 118 
Problem Investigation 145 
Request Work Info 95 
Service Request 92, 98 
Solution Database 151 
Task 128 
Work Info 85, 129 
G 
generating reports 
about 65 
with advanced qualifications 69 
with qualifications 67 
with saved qualifications 70 
without qualifications 65 
Guest User permission 22 
H 
Help Desk, new features 20 
I 
icons 
Best Practice 10 
New 10 
impacted areas, indicating 47 
Incident Management console 
Manager Console tab 154 
opening from a browser 30 
opening with BMC Remedy User client 28 
Support Console tab 104 
Incident Management, about 11 
incidents 
See also assignments 
accepting assignments 122 
assigning 156 
to vendors 126 
assignment log 158 
closing 147 
costs, recording 139–141 
incidents (continued) 
creating 
infrastructure from 146 
known errors from 149 
problem investigations from 144 
solution entries from 150 
diagnosing 132 
five stages of request 26 
investigating 132 
life cycle of 24–26 
matching 20, 135 
monitoring status 157 
moving from investigation to resolution 137 
ownership, about 125 
process flow status 133 
reassigning 124 
recording 108–120 
recording time worked 122 
records 108–112 
relating as duplicates 114 
reopening 147, 159 
resolving 135, 141–147 
resolving with Solution database 101 
status 158 
templates 21 
unassigned, viewing 155 
using decision trees 114 
using templates 112 
viewing 133–135 
assignments 121 
changes through audit logs 162 
infrastructure changes 146 
inventory 
bulk inventory CI 167 
location CIs 169 
managing 170–173 
reserving 173 
using 173 
viewing locations 170 
Inventory Location form 169, 171 
investigations 132 
IT Service Management, about product 
family 10–13
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
K 
Known Error form 149 
known errors, creating 149 
L 
life cycle of an incident 24–26 
limiting number of broadcast messages 59 
location of CIs 169 
logs 
assignment 158 
audit 162 
event 97 
M 
main consoles 
URL for browser 77 
Manager console, about 154–155 
manager role 23 
managing inventory 170–173 
Modify Incident form 138, 141 
modifying 
customer profiles 119 
incidents 137 
profile 37 
records 42 
relationships 48 
service requests 85 
multi-tenancy 
unknown users 75 
multi-tenancy, defined 20 
N 
navigation pane 
about 36–38 
defined 20, 104 
new features 18–21 
New icon 10 
New Request Wizard, defined 80 
New/Modify Broadcasts form 56 
Notes field. See Work Info form 
Notes Log field. See Work Info form 
192 "Index 
notifications 
about 160 
assignments 121 
in SLM 161 
viewing through audit logs 162 
O 
opening 
Incident Management console from a 
browser 30 
Incident Management console from a 
desktop 28 
other applications 36 
Requester console 77 
service request records 92 
service requests 87, 93 
Overview console 31 
about 31–38 
functions 36 
opening from a browser 32 
opening from a desktop 32 
ownership for incidents 125 
P 
paging 
on-call groups 60–62 
one person 60–62 
People form 118 
permissions 
Command Event Master 97 
Request Console Master 22 
Requester console 74 
User, with Requester console 22 
printing 
records 41 
service requests 86 
prioritization, defined 21 
Problem Investigation form 145 
problem investigations, creating 144 
Problem Management, about 12 
process flow 
about 24–26 
accelerators, best practice 24 
monitoring incident status with 157 
status area 133
User’s Guide 
Index ! 193 
Process Flow Status wizard 24, 25 
recording new incidents with 109 
profile, viewing and modifying 37 
Q 
qualifications, generating reports with 67 
quick actions 
about 49 
using 38 
R 
recording 
CI unavailability 116 
incident with Process Flow Status wizard 109 
new incidents 108–120 
work performed on tasks 130 
records 
advanced searching for 40 
creating 34 
modifying 42 
printing 41 
relating and unrelating 43 
searching for 35, 38 
searching for all 41 
searching for personal 39 
refreshing data 35 
Registered User permission 22 
registered users 74 
relationships 
copying 46 
defining 43 
impacted areas 47 
modifying 48 
quick actions 49 
relating and unrelating records 43 
removing 51 
relocating CIs 172 
Remedy User. See BMC Remedy User 
reminders, creating 53–55 
removing relationships 51 
reopening 
closed incidents 147, 159 
resolved incidents 147 
Report console 66 
reports 
about 65 
generating 65 
with advanced qualifications 69 
with qualifications 67 
with saved qualifications 70 
without qualifications 65 
Request Console Master permission 22 
request masters 
adding work information 94 
canceling service requests 93 
Command Event Master permission 97 
defined 74 
opening service request records 92 
reopening service requests 93 
using Service Request forms 91 
viewing Work Info tab 94 
working with service requests 91 
Request Work Info form 95, 96 
Requester Console 
See also service requests 
Requester console 
functions 78 
opening 77 
user permissions 
Command Event Master 97 
Registered User 74 
Request Master 74 
Unknown User 74 
using 76–79 
requester role 21, 74 
reserving inventory 173 
resolution stage, moving incidents to 137 
resolving incidents 135, 141–147 
retrying events in order, best practice 98 
roles 
manager 23 
requester 21, 74 
support staff 22 
S 
scripts 
about 114 
defined 21 
Search Criteria area, defined 104
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
searching for 
all records 41 
records 35, 38 
records associated with people or groups 39 
service requests 86 
solutions 135–141 
Service Level Management. See SLM 
Service Request form 
about 98 
accessing 91 
adding work information 95 
search mode 92 
viewing work information 95 
service requests 
See also Requester Console 
accessing Service Request form 91 
ad hoc requests 82 
adding work information 94, 95 
canceling 87, 93 
completing surveys 88 
creating 80 
finding 86 
modifying 85 
opening records 92 
printing 86 
reopening 87, 93 
request IDs 86 
resolving with Solution database 101 
Service Request Wizard 80 
sorting 83 
states 83 
troubleshooting 97 
updating work info 85 
viewing 
event logs 97 
records 84 
Work Info tab 94 
work information 95 
service targets, indicator colors explained 134 
SLM 
about 12 
calculations 160 
notifications 161 
service target indicators 134–135 
status and indicators 134 
194 "Index 
Solution database 
creating entries 150 
resolving incidents 101 
Solution Database form 151 
solutions 
creating solution database entries 150 
searching for 135–141 
sorting service requests 83 
status values 
changes during life cycle of incidents 158 
selecting 37 
Support console, about 104–105 
support staff role, about 22 
surveys, service request 88 
T 
Task form 128 
tasks 
assigning 129 
creating 127–129 
recording work 130 
working with 127 
templates, using 112 
terminology changes 
Help Desk terms 21 
Incident Management terms 19 
troubleshooting service requests 97 
U 
unassigned incidents, viewing 155 
unknown users 
defined 74 
multi-tenancy 75 
URL 
to Incident Management console 30 
to main console 77 
users 
registered 74 
request master 74 
roles 21–23 
unknown 74 
using inventory 173
User’s Guide 
Index ! 195 
V 
vendors 
assigning incidents to 126 
communicating assigned incidents to 127 
viewing 
broadcasts 58, 102 
event logs 97 
incidents 133–135 
incidents assigned to people 121 
inventory locations 170 
profile 37 
request details 79 
service requests 78, 84 
unassigned incidents 155 
user requests 79 
Work Info tab 94 
work information 95 
W 
wizards 
Process Flow Status 24, 25, 109 
Service Request 80 
Work Info form 85, 129 
Work Info tab 
viewing 94 
work information, adding 51 
Work Log Assignments. See tasks
BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 
196 "Index
*60845* 
*60845* 
*60845* 
*60845* 
*60845*

Remedy

  • 1.
    BMC® Remedy® ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 User’s Guide June 2006 Part No: 60845
  • 2.
    Copyright 1991–2006 BMCSoftware, Inc. All rights reserved. BMC, the BMC logo, all other BMC product or service names, BMC Software, the BMC Software logos, and all other BMC Software product or service names, are registered trademarks or trademarks of BMC Software, Inc. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. BMC Software, Inc., considers information included in this documentation to be proprietary and confidential. Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable end user license agreement or nondisclosure agreement for the product and the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in this documentation. For license information about the OpenSource files used in the licensed program, please read OpenSourceLicenses.pdf. This file is in the Doc folder of the distribution CD-ROM and in the documentation download portion of the product download page. Restricted Rights Legend U.S. Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software. UNPUBLISHED -- RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES. Use, duplication, or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions, as applicable, set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14, DFARS 252.227-7013, DFARS 252.227-7014, DFARS 252.227-7015, and DFARS 252.227-7025, as amended from time to time. Contractor/Manufacturer is BMC Software, Inc., 2101 CityWest Blvd., Houston, TX 77042-2827, USA. Any contract notices should be sent to this address. Contacting Us If you need technical support for this product, contact Customer Support by email at support@remedy.com. If you have comments or suggestions about this documentation, contact Information Development by email at doc_feedback@bmc.com. This edition applies to version 7.0 of the licensed program. BMC Software, Inc. www.bmc.com
  • 3.
    Contents ! 3 Contents Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Best Practice and New icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 About the BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite. . . . . . . . . . . 10 BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 BMC Remedy Problem Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 BMC Service Level Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite documents . . . . . . . . . . 13 Chapter 1 Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 . . . . . . . 17 Installing and configuring Incident Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Incident Management user roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Requester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Support staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Incident manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Chapter 2 Using functions common to all ITSM applications . . . . . . . . . 27 Opening the main application console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using BMC Remedy User client to open a main console . . . . . . . . . 28
  • 4.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 4 "Contents Using a browser to open a main console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Working with the Overview console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Opening the Overview console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Assigned Work table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Viewing and creating broadcast messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Using the navigation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Using quick actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Auto-filling fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Working with records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Searching for records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Printing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Modifying records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Working with relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Defining relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Copying relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Indicating impacted areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Modifying relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Performing quick actions on a relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Removing relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Adding work information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Creating reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Broadcasting messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Creating broadcast messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Viewing broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Sending pages and email messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Paging a person or on-call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Sending email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Working with reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Using qualifications to generate a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Generating a report using saved qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Chapter 3 Working with the Requester console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Requester role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Service Request Management users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Understanding the Requester console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
  • 5.
    User’s Guide Openingthe Requester console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Functional areas and tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Working with service requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Creating a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Filtering service requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Viewing a service request record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Modifying a service request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Searching for service requests by Request ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Printing a service request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Canceling a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Reopening a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Completing surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Viewing service requests with errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Working with service requests as the Request Master . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Opening a service request record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Reopening a service request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Viewing or adding work information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Viewing the event log and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Service Request form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Working with the Solution database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Viewing broadcast messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Chapter 4 Working with Incident Management as support staff . . . . . . 103 Understanding the Support Console tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Setting application preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Recording a new incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Using the Process Flow Status wizard to record a new incident . . . . . . 109 Using a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Using the decision tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Using scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Relating incidents as duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Recording CI unavailability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Adding or modifying a customer profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Understanding assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Receiving notification of assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Working with assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Contents ! 5
  • 6.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 6 "Contents Reassigning an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Working with tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Investigating and diagnosing an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Viewing an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Searching for a solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Recording the cost of working on an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Resolving an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Creating a problem investigation from an incident . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Creating infrastructure change from an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Reopening a resolved incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Closing an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Creating known errors and solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Creating a known error from an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Creating a solution database entry from an incident . . . . . . . . . . 150 Chapter 5 Working with Incident Management as a manager . . . . . . . 153 Understanding the Manager Console tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Managing assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Viewing unassigned incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Assigning an incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Monitoring an incident's status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Reopening a closed incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Understanding SLM calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Understanding notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Viewing the audit log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Chapter 6 Managing configuration items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Creating a CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Creating a computer system CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Creating a bulk inventory CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Creating an inventory location CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Managing inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Viewing inventory locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Relocating CIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Reserving and using inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
  • 7.
    User’s Guide Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Contents ! 7
  • 8.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 8 "Contents
  • 9.
    Preface ! 9 Preface The BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 User’s Guide describes how to use the BMC® Remedy® Incident Management application. Incident Management is one of five BMC Remedy IT Service Management applications. The BMC® Remedy® IT Service Management Suite (BMC® Remedy® ITSM Suite) includes: ! The BMC® Remedy® Asset Management application. ! The BMC® Remedy® Change Management application. ! The BMC® Remedy® Service Desk solution (which includes the BMC® Remedy® Incident Management application and the BMC® Remedy® Problem Management application). ! The BMC® Service Level Management application. The applications run in conjunction with the BMC® Remedy® Action Request System® platform (BMC® Remedy® AR System® platform) and share a common database. All five applications consume data from the BMC® Atrium® Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application.
  • 10.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Best Practice and New icons 10 "Preface Documentation for the BMC Remedy ITSM Suite contains two icons. Icon Description The New icon identifies features or products that are new or enhanced with version 7.0. The Best Practice icon highlights processes or approaches that BMC has identified as the most effective way to leverage certain features in the suite. About the BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite There have been several updates to the BMC Remedy ITSM Suite since version 6.0. Note the change to the BMC® Remedy® Help Desk application. BMC is now offering the BMC Remedy Service Desk solution, which contains the following applications: ! BMC Remedy Incident Management ! BMC Remedy Problem Management BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 is installed with Asset Management, Change Management, and Service Desk (including Incident Management and Problem Management). It stores information about configuration items and their relationships in an inheritance-based data model, and has the ability to reconcile data from different sources. BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 provides a “single source of truth” about your IT environment, enabling other BMC applications to manage CIs, predict the impact of configuration changes, and perform other Business Service Management (BSM) functions. For more information, see the BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 User’s Guide.
  • 11.
    User’s Guide BMCRemedy Asset Management 7.0 The BMC Remedy Asset Management application lets IT professionals track and manage enterprise configuration items (CIs)—and their changing relationships—throughout the entire CI life cycle. As part of the BMC Remedy ITSM Suite, Asset Management is integrated with BMC Remedy Service Desk (which contains the BMC Remedy Incident Management and BMC Remedy Problem Management applications), BMC Remedy Change Management, and BMC Service Level Management, and offers flexibility to support customized business processes. For more information, see the BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 User’s Guide. BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 Using ITIL-compatible best practices, BMC Remedy Change Management provides IT organizations with the ability to manage changes by enabling them to assess impact, risk, and resource requirements, and then create plans and automate approval functions for implementing changes. It provides scheduling and task assignment functionality, and reporting capabilities for reviewing performance and improving processes. Because Change Management is integrated with BMC Atrium CMDB, Change Management lets you relate changes to other records, such as configuration items (including services) and incidents. For more information, see the BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide. BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 BMC Remedy Incident Management is used to manage incidents. Incident management is reactive, and is typically initiated in response to a customer call or automated event. An example of an automated event might be an alert from a monitoring system, such as BMC® Service Impact Management (BMC® SIM). The primary goal of the incident management process, according to ITIL standards, is “to restore normal service operation as quickly as possible with minimum disruption to the business, thus ensuring that the best achievable levels of availability and service are maintained.” About the BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite ! 11
  • 12.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 12 "Preface An incident is any event that is not part of the standard operation of a service and that causes an interruption to or a reduction in the quality of that service. Normal service operation is the operation of services within the limits specified by Service Level Management (SLM). For more information, see the BMC Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 User’s Guide. BMC Remedy Problem Management 7.0 BMC Remedy Problem Management is used to manage problem investigations, known errors, and solution database entries. Problem management can proactively prevent the occurrence of incidents, errors, and additional problems. A problem investigation helps an IT organization get to the root cause of incidents. It initiates actions that help to improve or correct the situation, preventing the incident from recurring. After a problem investigation identifies the cause, this information can result in either a known error or a solution database entry. A known error is a problem that has been successfully diagnosed and for which a temporary work-around or permanent solution has been identified. A solution database entry contains information that might be required to provide or restore a service. For more information, see the BMC Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide. BMC Service Level Management 7.0 BMC Service Level Management enables a service provider, such as an IT organization, a customer support group, or an external service provider, to formally document the needs of its customers or lines of business using service level agreements, and provide the correct level of service to meet those needs. Service Level Management also provides a means to review, enforce, and report on the level of service provided. It streamlines the most important task of all, which is the communication between a service provider and its customers. Multiple service targets can be defined and monitored, acting as a bridge between IT service support and IT operations. This enables costs to be controlled and helps to provide a consistent level of service in support of a key business service.
  • 13.
    User’s Guide Formore information, see the BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User’s Guide. Audience ! 13 Audience Incident Management is intended for the following IT professionals: ! IT support staff ! IT managers The Requester console is intended for any IT user. BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite documents The following table lists the documentation available for the BMC Remedy ITSM Suite. Unless otherwise noted, online documentation in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format is available on product installation CDs, on the Customer Support website (http://supportweb.remedy.com), or both. You can order printed documentation from SMBU-Upgrade@bmc.com. Note: To access the support website, you must have a support contract. You can access application Help by clicking on Help links within the application. Title Document provides Audience Format ITSM Configuration Quick Start Start with this reference card to quickly install and configure applications in the ITSM suite. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Remedy Action Request System 7.0 Concepts Concepts for using the Action Request System. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Remedy Action Request System 7.0 Installing Procedures for installing the Action Request System. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Common Data Model Diagram Hierarchical diagram of all classes in the CDM, including unique attributes and applicable relationships. Administrators PDF
  • 14.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Title Document provides Audience Format BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Common Data Model Help 14 "Preface Description and details of superclasses, subclasses, attributes, and relationships for each class. Administrators HTML BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Concepts and Best Practices Guide Information about CMDB concepts and best practices for planning your BMC Atrium CMDB implementation. Executives and administrators Print and PDF BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Developer’s Reference Guide Information about creating API programs, C and Web Services API functions and data structures, and a list of error messages. Administrators and programmers PDF BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Help Help for using and configuring BMC Atrium CMDB. Users and administrators Product Help BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Installation and Configuration Guide Information about installing and configuring BMC Atrium CMDB, including permissions, class definitions, reconciliation, and federation. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Javadoc API Help Information about Java classes, methods, and variables that integrate with BMC Atrium CMDB. Programmers HTML BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Master Index Combined index of all books. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Release Notes Information about new features and known issues. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 User’s Guide Information about using BMC Atrium CMDB, including searching for CIs and relationships, launching federated data, reporting, and running reconciliation jobs. Users Print and PDF BMC Remedy 7.0 Approval Server Guide for Users and Administrators Topics on installation and configuration of the Approval Server, how to use the Approval Server, and understanding the approval workflow. Users and administrators Print and PDF BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide Procedures for configuring the BMC Remedy IT Service Management applications. Administrators Print and PDF
  • 15.
    User’s Guide TitleDocument provides Audience Format BMC Remedy IT Service Management Suite documents ! 15 BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Installation Guide Procedures for installing the BMC Remedy IT Service Management applications and solutions: BMC Remedy Service Desk solution (BMC Remedy Incident Management and BMC Remedy Problem Management), BMC Remedy Change Management, and BMC Remedy Asset Management. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 Help Help for using BMC Remedy Asset Management. Everyone Product Help BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 Release Notes Information about known issues in each release of BMC Remedy Asset Management. Also provides a list of new features included with the application. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 User’s Guide Procedures for using the BMC Remedy Asset Management application; includes new features and overview. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 Help Help for using BMC Remedy Change Management. Everyone Product Help BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 Release Notes Information about known issues in each release of BMC Remedy Change Management. Also provides a list of new features included with the application. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide Procedures for using the BMC Remedy Change Management application; includes new features and overview. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Remedy Service Desk 7.0 Release Notes Information about known issues in each release of BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management and BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management. Also provides a list of new features included with the application. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 Help Help for using BMC Remedy Incident Management. Everyone Product Help BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management 7.0 User’s Guide Procedures for using the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Incident Management application; includes new features and overview. Everyone Print and PDF
  • 16.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Title Document provides Audience Format BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 Help 16 "Preface Help for using BMC Remedy Problem Management. Everyone Product Help BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide Procedures for using the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management application; includes new features and overview. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Service Level Management 7.0 Configuration Guide Procedures for configuring the BMC Service Level Management application. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Service Level Management 7.0 Configuration Help Help for configuring the BMC Service Level Management application. Administrators Product Help BMC Service Level Management 7.0 Installation Guide Procedures for installing the BMC Service Level Management application. Administrators Print and PDF BMC Service Level Management 7.0 Release Notes Information about known issues in each release of BMC Service Level Management. Also provides a list of new features included with the application. Everyone PDF BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User Help Help for using the BMC Service Level Management application. Everyone Product Help BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User’s Guide Procedures for using the BMC Service Level Management application; includes new features and overview. Everyone Print and PDF BMC Remedy 7.0 Task Management Administrator’s Guide Procedures to configure Task Management. Note: This guide also includes steps to configure seamless authentication between BMC Remedy Change Management and the other components of BMC Remedy Change and Configuration Management (CCM). Administrators Print and PDF
  • 17.
    Chapter 1 IntroducingBMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 The Service Desk: Incident Management application is used to manage incidents. Incident management is reactive, and is typically initiated in response to a customer call. The primary goal of the incident management process, according to ITIL standards, is “to restore normal service operation as quickly as possible with minimum disruption to the business, thus ensuring that the best achievable levels of availability and service are maintained.” An incident is any event that is not part of the standard operation of a service and that causes an interruption to or a reduction in the quality of that service. Normal service operation is the operation of services within the limits specified by the service target. The following topics are provided: ! Installing and configuring Incident Management (page 18) ! What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 (page 18) ! Incident Management user roles (page 21) ! Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request (page 24) Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 ! 17
  • 18.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Installing and configuring Incident Management Your administrator installs and configures Incident Management. For details, see: ! BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Installation Guide ! BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 The new features in this release of Incident Management include: ! Improved ITIL conformance—A new process flow tool helps you follow ITIL processes for incident management. ! Enhanced user interface—The user interface is now more consistent with other BMC applications. To help speed use of the application, forms and dialog boxes have been streamlined, and Quick Action accelerators have been added. ! Role-based consoles—Support staff, managers, and requesters have separate consoles. The Requester console provides customer access. ! Permission model—Permissions and functional roles have been enhanced to provide greater flexibility in setting up user access. For details, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. ! Task management—You can assign tasks to one or more people without changing the incident assignment. For previous users of Incident Management, this replaces the work log action feature. Now you can assign and view tasks without going into the work log. ! Direct view into CMDB—This allows you to manage configuration items (CIs) from Incident Management. ! Cost tracking—The cost for each incident can be tracked as the incident moves between support groups for diagnosis, resolution, and closure, based on either flat-rate or time-based costs. 18 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
  • 19.
    User’s Guide !Reporting—Incident Management now includes the reports described in Report Description Group Assignment to Incidents This report lists incidents and their What’s new in Incident Management 7.0 ! 19 the following table. ! Service Level Management—If Service Level Management is installed, the Incident form displays the status of service targets. ! Enhanced audit log—You can now filter the audit log, for example, to see only date field audit records or assignment changes. ! Terminology changes—You can find terminology changes in the following table. assigned support groups for a specified date range. Open Incident volume by Assignee This bar chart displays the number of open incidents for each assignee. Incidents by activity times This report lists all open incidents and the amount of time since the reported date. Resolved and Closed Incident Volume by Assignee This bar chart displays the number of resolved and closed incidents for each assignee. Change induced incidents This report lists incidents that were caused by changes. Note: This report is available only if Change Management is installed. Table 1-1: Key terminology changes in Incident Management Previous term New term Associate Relate Associations Relationships Automatic Routing Auto Assign Delete Remove—This change applies only to the Relationship and Financial tabs, to clarify the action being performed. Service Categorization Operational Categorization
  • 20.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 What’s new for Help Desk users? Table 1-1: Key terminology changes in Incident Management Previous term New term Work Log Work Info Work Log Action Task This release replaces BMC® Remedy® Help Desk with Incident Management and Problem Management. New Incident Management features for former Help Desk users include the features mentioned in the previous paragraphs, and also the following features: ! Enhanced problem management—Problem investigations have a separate form. Problem Management includes new processes to manage the life cycle of a problem investigation and known errors, and to record solution database entries. ! Navigation pane—Located on the left side of consoles and forms, this provides access to common functions, such as assigning an incident to yourself. ! Multi-tenancy—This makes it possible to host multiple companies and their data on a single server. This feature can also be used for any groups, such as business units or departments, whose data must be kept separate. Multi-tenancy is limited to the company level in Incident Management. Configuration can differ on a per-company basis. Multi-tenancy from the user’s perspective is accessed by selecting the appropriate company from the list next to the Company field. ! Incident matching—From the Incident form, users can perform searches for known errors, solution database entries, problem investigations, and other incidents that match criteria from the current incident to assist in the incident resolution process. ! Categorization—This is recorded separately for operational and product categorization, each with multiple levels to provide greater flexibility. Due to multi-tenancy, each company or business unit can be configured with its own categorization. ! Decision tree—This takes the user step-by-step through a questionnaire, and, based on answers, completes part of the form for a new incident. A manager or administrator can build decision trees. 20 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
  • 21.
    User’s Guide !Scripts—These are detailed instructions that an administrator or manager sets up to help users record important information about an incident. Scripts can be used when recording or assigning an incident. ! Incident templates—These can be used to populate incident records with standard information that is entered on a regular basis. A template can also set a relationship to a configuration item (CI). An administrator can create templates for commonly occurring incidents, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. ! Prioritization—Incident priority is now determined by impact and urgency. This can be configured by an administrator, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. ! Terminology changes—You can find a terminology change in the Table 1-2: Key terminology change between Help Desk and Incident Management Help Desk term Incident Management term Bulletin Board Broadcast Incident Management user roles ! 21 following table. Incident Management user roles Incident Management provides functionality for IT users with the requester role, for support staff, and for managers. Important: The permission model in Incident Management has had several updates since version 6.0. To define permissions and functional roles, review the permissions and functional roles sections in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. Requester IT users can request resolution of incidents through the Requester console. This console gives requesters access to: ! Public broadcast messages. ! Their own incident and change requests. ! A satisfaction survey, which can be completed on resolution of an incident or change request.
  • 22.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 The Requester console provides access based on the following permissions: ! Request Console Master—This user is responsible for configuring the Requester console. The request console master can view all the requests submitted by other users. This user is more of an administrator than a support user. ! Registered User—This user has a record in the People form, and the user’s login information is in the Login/Access Details tab of the People form. ! Guest User—All other users are considered to be guest users even if a user has a record in the People form. If a user’s login information does not exist in the user record, then the user is considered a guest user. Guest users cannot create change requests. Support staff First-line support staff are members of the Service Desk. They are the primary contacts for all customers and are responsible for recording incidents and coordinating their resolution. Typically, the first-line support staff own all incidents and are therefore responsible for validating incident resolutions with their customers. Second-line and third-line support are considered subject matter experts. Their main responsibility is to provide an accurate analysis and diagnosis of their assigned incidents to restore service to the affected customers. Support staff responsibilities include: ! Creating, classifying, and updating incident records. ! Verifying the Customer Profile data and updating the information if appropriate. ! Relating CIs to the incident. ! Escalating incidents that need to be resolved based on SLM terms or perception of urgency. ! Resolving incidents or assigning for resolution. ! Coordinating and validating resolutions with customers. ! Closing incidents and determining customer satisfaction. 22 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
  • 23.
    User’s Guide Supportcan also participate in the problem management process, as described in the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide. They can also participate in the change management process, as described in the BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide. Incident Management user roles ! 23 Incident manager Incident managers are responsible for the quality and integrity of the incident management processes. Support group leads and managers are responsible for the work of members of their support group. They coordinate the assignment of incidents to support staff. Their responsibilities include: ! Monitoring incidents. ! Monitoring open incidents requiring assignment. ! Managing the assignment of incidents to their appropriate support groups for resolution. ! Receiving notifications of incident assignments and escalations. ! Facilitating the resolution of escalated incidents in accordance with the escalation policy. ! Ensuring the resolution of incidents within the support group's service targets. ! Ensuring the overall completeness and accuracy of closed incidents. ! Reviewing reports. ! Ensuring that incidents requiring root cause analysis are copied into Problem Management. ! Managing support group membership. ! Managing scripts, templates, and decision trees.
  • 24.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request The Process Flow Status area displays the process flow of the incident request within the Incident form. A diagram shows the five stages of an incident request, as indicated by best practices, rooted in ITIL processes. The current stage of the incident is highlighted. The status of the incident is indicated by both color and text. Figure 1-1: Example of selecting an accelerator from the Process Flow Status wizard The Process Flow Status area also serves as a wizard, guiding you through the stages of the incident life cycle. At each stage, the diagram provides accelerators applicable to the current stage. For example, you can use accelerators to move the incident to a pending state or to the next stage. When you select an accelerator, a dialog box appears, prompting you to enter the data required to complete the task. You can also enter optional recommended data in the dialog box. By using the process flow accelerators, you are following ITIL best practices. Process Flow Status area Current stage 24 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0
  • 25.
    User’s Guide Figure1-2: Selecting an accelerator from the Process Flow Status wizard Figure 1-3: Example of form displayed by Process Flow Status wizard Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request ! 25
  • 26.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Table 1-3: The five stages of an incident request Incident stage Description Tasks Identification and recording This stage initiates the incident management process. The purpose of this stage is to accurately record and recognize disruptions to services provided by IT to its customers. For details, see “Recording a new incident” on page 108. 26 "Chapter 1—Introducing BMC Remedy Incident Management 7.0 ! Next stage ! Enter pending (or resume) ! Select template Investigation and diagnosis In this stage, you can search existing information to identify a possible solution. If the incident cannot be resolved or a root cause analysis is required, you can escalate the incident to problem management. For details, see “Investigating and diagnosing an incident” on page 132. Next stage ! Generate problem ! Generate change ! Relate CI ! Enter pending (or resume) Note: Generate change is available only as a task if Change Management is installed. Resolution and recovery In this stage, you resolve and recover from the service disruption to enable the customer to resume work. For details, see “Resolving an incident” on page 141. ! Next stage ! Generate problem ! Generate change ! Enter pending (or resume) Incident closure In this stage, you make sure that the incident has successfully restored the service to the customer and that the customer is satisfied with the outcome. For details, see “Closing an incident” on page 147. ! Reopen ! Close Closed In this stage the incident is closed. No further activities are performed on the incident. None
  • 27.
    Chapter 2 Usingfunctions common to all ITSM applications This section contains basic procedures that are common to most forms and consoles. Most of the information in this section is similar throughout the ITSM suite. The following topics are provided: ! Opening the main application console (page 28) ! Working with the Overview console (page 31) ! Working with records (page 38) ! Working with relationships (page 43) ! Adding work information (page 51) ! Creating reminders (page 53) ! Sending pages and email messages (page 60) ! Working with reports (page 65) Using functions common to all ITSM applications ! 27
  • 28.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Opening the main application console You start an ITSM application by opening its main console. How you do this depends on whether you want to view the console through the BMC® Remedy® User client or through a browser. See the following instructions for information about opening the main console. Using BMC Remedy User client to open a main console This section describes how to open an application’s main console from the IT Home page, by way of BMC Remedy User. " To open the application’s main console from the BMC Remedy User tool 1 Choose Start > Programs > Action Request System > BMC Remedy User. The Login dialog box appears. Figure 2-1: Login dialog box 2 Perform the following steps: a In the User Name field, type your user name. b In the Password field, enter your password. 28 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 29.
    User’s Guide cIn the Preference Server field, specify the server name if your administrator set up a preference server for centralized user preferences. For example, if you have a report server from which you can access predefined reports, you specify it here. Opening the main application console ! 29 3 Click OK to log in. The Home Page form opens automatically. If it does not, perform the following steps in BMC Remedy User: a Choose Tools > Options. b In the Options dialog box, click the Home Page tab. Figure 2-2: Home Page tab on the Options dialog box
  • 30.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 c Select the check box to open the home page automatically. 4 When the IT Home page opens, click the Incident Management Console link from the navigation pane. Figure 2-3: IT Home page Navigation pane Incident Management Console link Using a browser to open a main console This section describes how to open the Incident Management console from a browser. " To open a main console from a browser 1 Type the following URL in to your browser’s address bar: http://<web_server>:<port>/arsys/apps/<arsystem_server>/Home Page where: <web_server> is the fully qualified name of the BMC Remedy Mid Tier system, specified in the format server_name.company.com. <port> is an optional port number, which is needed if the web server is not on the default port (port 80). <arsystem_server> is the name of your BMC Remedy AR System server. 30 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 31.
    User’s Guide Fora list of supported browsers, see the compatibility matrix at: http://supportweb.remedy.com/Rem/IssuesAndSolutions/ CompatibilityMatrix/index.jsp 2 Enter your user name and password, then click Login. 3 When the IT Home page opens, click the Incident Management Console link in the navigation pane. For an illustration of the IT Home page, see Figure 2-3 on page 30. Working with the Overview console The Overview console is the primary interface for support staff. It provides quick access to the information you need and to the procedures that you perform most often. This section discusses how to use the Overview console. Figure 2-4: BMC Remedy IT Service Management Overview console Working with the Overview console ! 31
  • 32.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Opening the Overview console The BMC Remedy IT Service Management Overview console provides quick access to commonly performed functions. " To open the Overview console from your desktop 1 Open BMC Remedy User as described in “Using BMC Remedy User client to open a main console” on page 28. 2 On the Home Page form, under the Remedy Foundation Elements heading, click the Overview Console link. The Overview console appears. " To open the Overview console from a browser 1 Launch your browser as described in “Using a browser to open a main console” on page 30. 2 On the Home Page form, under the Remedy Foundation Elements heading, click the Overview Console link. The Overview console appears. Using the Assigned Work table The Assigned Work table lists different types of records. The types of records that you can select depend on the BMC Remedy applications that are installed. Each type of record is identified by a specific prefix: ! CHG—Identifies change requests. BMC Remedy Change Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view change requests. ! SDB—Identifies solution database entries. BMC Remedy Problem Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view solution entries. ! TAS—Identifies tasks. Tasks can be attached to incidents, problem investigations, or change requests. ! INC—Identifies incidents. BMC Remedy Incident Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view incidents. 32 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 33.
    User’s Guide !PBI—Identifies problems. BMC Remedy Problem Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view problems. ! PKE—Identifies known errors. BMC Remedy Problem Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view known errors. ! PR—Identifies purchase requisitions. BMC Remedy Asset Management must be installed for you to be able to create and view purchase requisitions. You can also change the table’s contents by using the Company filter and Console View fields at the top left corner of the console: ! Company—Shows records associated with a particular company (useful Working with the Overview console ! 33 in a multi-tenancy environment). ! Personal—Shows all the records that are assigned to you. ! Selected Groups—The options below this heading apply to records that are assigned to your support groups. When you select an option for selected groups, you are prompted to select from all support groups for which you are a member. ! Show All—Shows all records for the groups you select. ! Show Unassigned—Shows all the records that are unassigned to an individual, but which are assigned to the groups you select. ! All My Groups—Shows all the records that are assigned to all support groups that you belong to. If you belong to more than one support group, the records for all those groups appear. ! Show All—Shows all records. ! Show Unassigned—Shows all the records that are unassigned. In the Windows environment, if there are more records than the application can show in the table, you can see the next grouping of entries by placing the pointer in the table and right-clicking, then clicking either Next or Prev. When using a browser, use the arrow keys at the top corner of the table. You can create new records by clicking the Create button that appears below the table.
  • 34.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Creating records From the Overview console, you can create new records for the various ITSM applications installed on your system. The types of requests you can create from the Overview console depend on the applications you have installed. " To create records 1 From the Overview console, click Create. The Select Request Type dialog box appears. Figure 2-5: Select Request Type dialog box 2 From the Request Type list, select the type of record you want to create. Note: The available request types depend on which ITSM applications are installed on your system. 3 Click Select. The New form of the application appropriate to the type of record you are creating appears. 4 Enter all the required information to create the request. For details on creating a new incident, see “Recording a new incident” on page 108. For more information about creating other types of records, see the related application’s user guide. 34 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 35.
    User’s Guide Searchingfor records From the Overview console, you can search for records from the various ITSM applications installed on your system. The types of records you can search for depend on the applications you have installed. " To search for records 1 From the Overview console, click Search. The Select Request Type dialog box appears. 2 From the Request Type list, select the type of record for which you want to Working with the Overview console ! 35 search. Note: The request types available depend on which ITSM applications are installed on your system. 3 Click Select. A search dialog box appropriate to the type of record for which you are searching appears. 4 Enter search criteria as needed to search for the record. For more information about searching for records, see “Searching for records” on page 38. Refreshing data After you create or modify a record, click Refresh to see the latest changes in the Assigned Work table. The Refresh button is located in the top right corner of the console. If you have changed the search criteria, you can return to your defaults by clicking Set to Defaults.
  • 36.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Viewing and creating broadcast messages Use the Broadcast feature, on the lower portion of the console, to view and create messages that can be viewed by the entire organization or by users in the support, approver, management, and administrator groups. For information about using Broadcasts, see “Broadcasting messages” on page 55. Using the navigation pane The pane on the left side of the console is the navigation pane. Changing the console view The links under Console View help you filter records that appear in the Assigned Work table. For more information about using the Console View functions, see “Using the Assigned Work table” on page 32. Using console functions The following links are under the Console Functions heading: ! Select Status Values—Lets you see only those records in a certain state, which you specify from the Select Status Values dialog box. See “Selecting status values” on page 37. ! My Profile—Lets you set your profile. See “Viewing your profile” on page 37. ! Application Preferences—Lets you set your application preferences and options. This function is also available from the Incident Management console, as described in “Setting application preferences” on page 106. Opening other applications Use the Other Applications links to open other, available ITSM applications. The links that appear under the Other Applications heading are determined by the applications that are installed on your system: ! Incident Management—Opens the Incident Management application. ! Change Management—Opens the Change Management application. ! Problem Management—Opens the Problem Management application. 36 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 37.
    User’s Guide !Asset Management—Opens the Asset Management application. ! Approval—Allows you to view all requests pending approval. ! CMDB—Opens the BMC Atrium CMDB Class Manager console. ! SLM—Opens the Service Level Management application. Selecting status values You can use the Select Status Values dialog box to filter the requests that appear in the Overview console based on their status. " To select status values 1 From the navigation pane in the Overview console, choose Console Functions > Select Status Values. The Select Status Values dialog box appears. 2 Select the status values for each category from the lists, then click OK. Working with the Overview console ! 37 The dialog box closes. 3 If the Assigned Work table does not refresh with the filtered records, click Refresh to reload the table’s contents. Viewing your profile You can view and modify your personal profile. When you click My Profile, the People (Search) form appears. In this form, you can: ! Update company information such as organization, business, and home address, and so on. ! View permissions. For detailed information about the People form, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. " To modify your profile 1 From the navigation pane, choose Console Functions > My Profile. The People form appears. 2 Update the information at the top of the form, or click the tab corresponding to the area in which you want to change the profile information.
  • 38.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Make your changes by selecting from the various lists that are available. 3 When you finish making the changes, click Save. Using quick actions The Overview console lets you perform certain quick actions. From the Quick Actions list, select the appropriate action, then click Execute. ! Print—Lets you select records and print their contents. See “Printing records” on page 41. ! Home Page—Opens the Home Page. Auto-filling fields As you work with the forms and dialog boxes, you might see a plus sign (+) included in a field label. You can type part of the information next to these fields and press ENTER. If an exact match is located, the application automatically completes the field. If a selection list appears, double-click the item you want to put in the field. Using auto-fill fields and lists is faster, more consistent, and more accurate than typing the information. Working with records This section discusses some of the common functions related to record handling. Searching for records Two types of searches are available from the Incident Management console. One type of search looks only through records that are in some way associated with you through your login ID or group ID (for example, records created by you, assigned to you or to your support group, and so on) and that meet your specific search criteria. You execute this type of search from the Search area near the top of the console. For a description of how to run this type of search, see “Searching your records” on page 39. 38 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 39.
    User’s Guide Note:To view the support groups you belong to, from the navigation pane, choose Console Functions > My Profile, then on your profile click the Support Groups tab. For more information about this function, see “Viewing your profile” on page 37. The other type of search looks through all of the records that meet your search criteria, regardless of their associations to people or groups. You run this type of search by using the Search Incident link in the navigation pane of the Incident Management console. For a description of how to run this type of search, see “Searching all records” on page 41. Searching your records The following procedure describes how to search the application for records associated with you or your group and that meet your specific search criteria. Use this type of search when you are looking for a record that you know is associated with your ID or with your group’s ID. " To search records assigned to your groups 1 From the console Search area, select your search criteria from the various Working with records ! 39 selection boxes. Figure 2-6: Search Criteria area Note: The most commonly searched-upon record fields appear in the Search Criteria area of the console. More record fields are available as search criteria under the Advanced Search option, as described in “Using the Advanced Search feature” on page 40. 2 Click Search.
  • 40.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 The Assigned Work table updates with the results of your search. 3 Scroll through the Assigned Work table to find the specific record you want. Note: If the search returns a large number of records, use the Advanced Search feature to help you narrow the results. You can also search for another record from within an open record by using the standard BMC Remedy User search function. Using the Advanced Search feature If your search returns too broad a range of records, you can perform an advanced search to narrow the results. " To use the Advanced Search feature 1 From the Incident Management console, click Advanced Search. The Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box appears. Figure 2-7: Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box 2 From the Keywords or Fields selection boxes, select the keywords or record fields on which you want to search. To insert operators (+, =, >,<, and so on), click the appropriate operator button. Do not forget to place literal values between quotation marks. For example, to search for an incident with a priority of “high,” you would construct the following search: 'Priority' = "High" 3 Click Select. The dialog box closes and you return to the main console. 40 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 41.
    User’s Guide Workingwith records ! 41 4 Click Search. The search results table updates with the results of your search. Searching all records The following procedure describes how to search all incidents. Use this type of search when you are looking for an incident that is not associated with your ID or your group’s ID, or anytime you need to search all incidents. " To search all records 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Search Incident. A form appears that allows you to perform the search. The form is laid out in a similar way to the Incident form, and contains the same tabs and fields. You can use any of the tabs and fields in the form to specify your search criteria. 2 Using the tabs and fields, build your search condition. To reduce the number of records found by the search, enter as much information into the form as you can. 3 When you finish entering your search criteria, click Search. When the search finishes, the search results table lists all of the records that match the search criteria. 4 Scroll through the table to find the specific record you want. 5 When you find the record, open it in the Incident form by double-clicking it in the search results table. Printing records You can print a copy of a record to keep for filing purposes or to share with someone who does not have access to the application. Use this procedure to print a record. " To print a record 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Search Incident.
  • 42.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 2 Select the record you want to print. Note: If you already have the record open and want to print it, click Print at the bottom of the form to open the Business Objects Report Preview dialog box, then go to step 4. 3 At the bottom of the console, from the Quick Actions list, select Print, then click Execute. The Business Objects Report Preview dialog box appears, allowing you to view the record before you print it. 4 Click the Print icon on the menu bar at the top of the dialog box. When the print confirmation dialog box appears, click the Print icon to send the record to your local printer. 5 Close the Business Objects dialog box. Modifying records After you generate a record, you can modify or update the information it contains. Use the following procedure to modify a record. " To modify a record 1 From the Incident Management console, open the record that you want to modify. 2 Click the tab that contains the information you want to update. 3 Make the appropriate changes. 4 Click Save. 42 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 43.
    User’s Guide Workingwith relationships ! 43 Working with relationships By defining and maintaining relationships among records, you can create a more sophisticated overview of the connections and interdependencies among the current record and other service issues being tracked by the application. An incident can be related to any of the following record types: ! Configuration item ! Another incident ! Solution database entry ! Known error ! Problem investigation If you have Asset Management and Change Management, an incident can also be related to the following record types: ! CI unavailability ! Infrastructure change Defining relationships Use the following procedure to define a relationship. " To define a relationship 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident from which you want to define a relationship. 2 Click the Relationships tab. Figure 2-8: Relationships tab
  • 44.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 3 From the Request Type list at the bottom of the Relationships tab, select the type of record to which you want to relate the current record. For example, to relate your incident to a configuration item, select Problem Investigation from the Request Type list. 4 Click Search. A dialog box appears that allows you to perform a search. Figure 2-9: Example of Completed Relationship Search Note: The content of the dialog box depends on the type of record you chose in the Request Type list. 5 Complete the search criteria tabs with the relevant information, then click Search. Try to supply as much information as possible in the search dialog box to reduce the overall number of records returned by the search. The matching results appear in a search results table. 6 From the search results table, select the configuration item with which you want to create the relationship. 44 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 45.
    User’s Guide 7From the Relationship Type list at the bottom of the search dialog box, select Working with relationships ! 45 the type of relationship you want to create. 8 Click Relate. An information message dialog box appears, displaying a confirmation message. 9 Click OK to dismiss the dialog box. 10 Click Close to close the search dialog box. The Relationships tab appears with the newly created relationship visible in the Relationships table. If there are events for the related item, the Current Events dialog box appears. This dialog box shows all current broadcasts that have been generated and related to the associated item. Broadcasts can be generated from other ITSM application modules, too. 11 In the Current Events dialog box, select one of the following options: ! Relate the current record to the originating record. ! Link a record. ! Relate the current record to the selected unavailability record. The lower table lists any current Unavailability recorded in an incident. To relate the current record to the origination record a Select the broadcast from the list. b Click Originating Record. To see additional details about the originating record, click Details. To link a record a Click Linked Incident. To relate the current record to the selected unavailability record a Click Relate. b To see additional details about the unavailability, click View CI Unavailability. c To see information about the record that generated the unavailability, click Details.
  • 46.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 An administrator can disable Current Events functionality in the Configure Incident Rules form. See the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide for information about how to do this. Copying relationships When you define a relationship between the current record and another record, the other record might also have one or more records related to it. Using the Copy Related Relationships form, which you open from the Relationships tab, you can look at the related record’s other relationships. If you determine that any of these other relationships should be related to the current record, you can define the relationship from this form. By doing this, you can more thoroughly document all of the record relationships. Note: You cannot use this procedure to copy related CIs. " To copy relationships 1 From the Incident Management console, open an incident. 2 Click the Relationships tab. 3 From the Relationships table, select a record related to the current incident. 4 From the Quick Actions list, select Get Related Relationships, then click Execute. The Copy Related Relationships dialog box appears. This dialog box contains a table of all other records related to the record you selected in step 3. 5 From the table of related records, select the other record that you want to relate to the current record. Note: To see the details of the other record, select it, then click View. A form appears with detailed information about the selected record. Use this feature to help you determine whether you want to relate the other record to the current record. 6 Click inside the Relationship Type field. A list of relationship types appears. 46 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 47.
    User’s Guide Note:The contents of the Relationship Type list depends on the type of record you are trying to create the relationship with. 7 Select the type of relationship you want to create, then click Select. A note appears confirming the relationship creation. Click OK to dismiss the note. Working with relationships ! 47 8 Close the Copy Related Relationships form. The newly created relationship appears in the Relationships table. Indicating impacted areas The Impacted Areas dialog box gives you a place to show the region, site, location, and so on, that are affected by the content of the record. Use the following procedure to indicate the impacted areas. " To indicate an impacted area 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident for which you want to indicate an impacted area. 2 In the navigation pane, choose Advanced Functions > Impacted Areas. The Impacted Areas dialog box appears. Figure 2-10: Impacted Areas dialog box
  • 48.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 3 Select items from the various lists that help to describe the impacted area appropriate for the incident you are working on, for example, Company, Region, and so on. Note: Required fields are marked with an asterisk. 4 Click Add. You can add as many impacted areas as necessary. You can also delete areas that you have previously chosen in this dialog box. 5 When you are finished indicating the impacted areas, click Close. Modifying relationships After you define a relationship, you change the relationship type and update the relationship description. Use the following procedure to modify the relationship. " To modify a relationship 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident that has the relationship you want to modify. 2 Click the Relationships tab. 3 From the Relationships table, select the relationship you want to modify. 4 From the Quick Actions list, select Modify Relationship Type, then click Execute. The Modify Relationship dialog box appears. 48 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 49.
    User’s Guide Workingwith relationships ! 49 Figure 2-11: Modify Relationship dialog box 5 Enter the new relationship details according to the on-screen instructions. 6 Click Save to save your changes. Performing quick actions on a relationship You can perform many other actions on a relationship. For a list of these actions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2. " To perform a quick action 1 From the Incident Management console, open an incident. 2 Click the Relationships tab. 3 From the Relationships table, select the relationship entry for which you want to perform the action. 4 From the Quick Actions list, select the action you want to perform, such as Get Impacted Areas.
  • 50.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 The following table lists available quick actions for any related item. Table 2-1: Effects of general relationship actions Relationship action Effect Get Related Relationships Copies the relationships of the selected record to the current incident’s relationships. Modify Relationship Type Prompts you to modify the relationship type, as described in “Modifying relationships” on page 48. Additional quick actions are available when you select a related configuration item, as indicated in the following table. Table 2-2: Effects of relationship actions for related CIs Relationship action Effect CI Relationship Viewer Opens a graphical relationship viewer that Create New CI Unavailability If Asset Management is installed, you can Get CI Impact/Urgency Copies the impact and urgency of the Get CI Product Categorization Copies the product categorization from Get CI Resolution Product Cat. Copies the product categorization from Get Impacted Areas If Asset Management is installed, prompts 5 Click Execute. shows a selected CI’s relationship with other records. create CI unavailability for the selected CI. selected CI. the selected CI to the classification of the current incident. the selected CI to the resolution of the current incident. you to select impacted areas, as defined in the selected CI, into the current incident’s impacted areas. 50 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 51.
    User’s Guide Addingwork information ! 51 Removing relationships Use the following procedure to remove a relationship. " To remove a relationship 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident that contains the relationship you want to remove. 2 Click the Relationships tab. 3 In the Relationships table, select the relationship you want to remove. 4 Click Remove. Click Yes when the application prompts you to confirm the removal. The application refreshes the Relationships tab. Adding work information Work Info is a new feature that replaces the Notes and Notes log fields from ITSM 6.0. You access this feature from the Work Info tab of the current record. Use this feature to add work information regarding activities performed on the current record. For example, you might want to add work information about the following activities: ! General Information—Notes about the record; for example, you might want to add a note that a particular CI was deployed, and include the date. ! Vendor communication—Notes about communication with a vendor, such as a bulletin received from a vendor. These are just some of the options available from the Work Info Type list on the Work Info tab. " To add work information 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident that you want to add the work information to. 2 Click the Work Info tab.
  • 52.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 2-12: Work Info tab 3 From the Work Info Type list, select the type of work information you want to add. 4 From the Source list, select the source of this information. Information sources can include, for example, email, phone, or the Web. 5 Enter the details of your work information record in the Summary and Details fields. 6 To add an attachment to the record, right-click in the attachment table and select Add from the menu that appears. 7 From the Locked list, select Yes or No to lock the log. Important: If you select Yes, you cannot modify the work log after you save it. 8 From the View Access list, select Internal or Public. ! Internal—If you want users within your organization to see the entry. ! Public—If you want everyone with access to the application to see the entry, including requesters from the Requester console. 9 Click Save. 10 To see a report of selected work information entries, select one or more entries, and click Report. 52 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 53.
    User’s Guide Creatingreminders ! 53 Creating reminders Use reminders to create notes for yourself and others. You can send the reminders by email or by BMC Remedy Alert, and can specify when they will be sent. You can create generic reminders, or you can create reminders that are associated with a specific request. For example, you can send yourself a note about a specific incident to remind yourself to follow up on it. You can create and view reminders from either the Incident Management console or from within a specific incident. The location from which you create or view a reminder determines which reminders you see: ! Incident Management console—You can view all reminders that you created. ! Incident form—You can view all reminders associated with that incident. This includes reminders created by other users of Incident Management. " To create a reminder 1 To open the Reminders dialog box, perform either of the following steps: ! From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Reminders. ! From the navigation pane in the Incident form, choose Functions > Reminders. Note: If you create a reminder from the application’s main console, the reminder is general in nature. If you open a record and create a reminder, the reminder is specific to the open record. 2 Click the Create Reminder tab.
  • 54.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 2-13: Completed Create Reminder tab Note: If you are creating the reminder from the main console, skip the next step. 3 To remove the link between the reminder you are creating and the open record, select, then delete the contents of the Link to Request-ID field. The Request-ID and Form fields are populated automatically by the application. The Request-ID field links the reminder to the open record. 4 From the Notify list, select either Individual or Group, depending on whether you are sending the reminder to a single person, or a support group. 5 In the Recipient field, type the name of the person or group to whom you want to send the reminder. If you type a person’s name and press ENTER, the application automatically populates the AR Login field. If the application discovers multiple matches with the name you entered, another dialog box appears that allows you to specify which of the matching names you want to receive the reminder. 6 In the Time field, enter the date and time you want the application to send the reminder. You can type the information directly into the field, or you can click the button next to the field and select the date and time from the calendar that appears. By default, the Time field contains the current date and time. 7 In the Subject field, enter information about the reminder. If you need more space to type the entry, click the Browse button next to the field. A larger text entry box appears. 54 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 55.
    User’s Guide Theinformation in this field appears in the subject line if the reminder is sent by email. Creating reminders ! 55 8 In the Message field, type the reminder message text. If you need more space to type the entry, click the ellipsis button next to the field. A larger text entry box appears. 9 Click Save. A confirmation message appears. 10 Click Close to close the Reminders dialog box. The reminder is sent at the time you specified. Broadcasting messages This feature lets you send messages to your entire organization, selected groups within the organization, and to external customers as well. You can use this feature to send messages about work in progress, system status, planned work, and so on. You can also use this feature to view messages that were broadcast to you from other groups in your organization. Creating broadcast messages This section describes how to create a broadcast message using the New/Modify dialog box. To create a broadcast, you must have the functional role of Broadcast Submitter. See the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide for details. " To create a broadcast message 1 You can open the New/Modify Broadcast dialog box from two locations, as follows: ! From the Incident Management console, click Create, which appears below the Broadcast table. If you create a broadcast from the main console, it is not related to a specific record. ! From the current record, in the navigation pane, choose Functions > Broadcast Incident. If you create a broadcast from an incident, a relationship is created between the broadcast and the incident.
  • 56.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 2-14: Completed New/Modify Broadcasts form 2 Enter information in the required fields. Required fields appear in bold on the Broadcast Details tab. ! Company—Select the company to which this broadcast pertains. Only users with access to this company will see the broadcast. If you select Global from the Company list, the broadcast is sent to everyone. The Company field is mandatory. If you complete the other location fields, however, you can indicate a very specific part of the company. For example, you can specify the site, organization, or department. ! Subject—A short description of what the broadcast is about. ! Broadcast Message—The text of your message. ! Broadcast Type—Select a broadcast type from the list. ! Broadcast Start Date and Broadcast End Date—To start the broadcast now, click in the Broadcast Start Date field, and press ENTER. To select a date from the calendar, click the Browse button next to the field, then use the calendar that appears to select the date on which the broadcast is to start and the date on which you want it to end. You can also specify times of the day using the Time feature at the bottom of the calendar. 56 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 57.
    User’s Guide !Broadcast Originated From—This field is completed by the system. The contents depend on where you are creating the broadcast. If you broadcast from an incident, this is set to Incident. ! Broadcast Originated From ID—This field is populated by the system, but only when you create a broadcast from within a record. If you create a broadcast from the main console, the field appears disabled. ! View Access—Select Internal if you want the broadcast visible only to members of your organization. Select Public if you also want the broadcast visible from the Requester console. ! Notify—Select Yes if you want a broadcast notification automatically sent to an individual or group. If you select Yes, an Email button and the Notify Support area appears. ! Use the Manual Email button to manually send an email about the broadcast to a person or group. When the Email System form appears, enter the recipient’s email address in the Internet Email field, then click Send Email Now. ! Use the Notify Support area to indicate the group you want to notify of the broadcast. You must complete all three fields, Support Company, Support Organization, and Support Group. The notification is sent at the time and on the date specified in the Broadcast Start Date field. ! Priority—Select a priority level for the broadcast. The choices are Low, Creating reminders ! 57 Medium, and High. 3 To add an attachment to the broadcast message, right-click inside the table and choose Add from the menu that appears. The Add Attachment dialog box appears. Use this to indicate the file you want to attach. Click Open to attach the indicated file. You are limited to one attachment for each broadcast. 4 If you want members of another group to be able to modify the message, perform the following steps: a Click the Authoring Groups tab. b Click Manage Authoring Groups. The Authoring Group dialog box appears. c Indicate the group that you want to have authoring rights by selecting from the menus. Click Add when you are finished.
  • 58.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Note: The support group you belong to appears in the table by default. You can indicate another group, or click Close to dismiss the dialog box. 5 Click Save to save the broadcast message and close the dialog box. Viewing broadcasts This section describes how to view broadcast messages. While viewing broadcasts, you can modify the message (if you belong to an authorized authoring group), create a new broadcast message, and under some circumstances (when viewing the message from the current record) relate the broadcast message to the current record. When viewing a broadcast from either the Incident Management console or the Incident form, you can create a new incident from the broadcast. If the broadcast was created from a problem investigation, CI (configuration item), CI unavailability, or another incident, the application asks whether you want to relate the new incident to the originating record. " To view broadcasts 1 You can view broadcast messages from two locations, as follows: ! From the Incident Management console, select the message you want to view from the Broadcast table, then click View. ! From the current record, in the navigation pane, choose Quick Links > View Broadcasts. The View Broadcasts dialog box appears. Select the message you want to view from the broadcast messages table; the Broadcast Details tab displays the details of the selected broadcast. Note: When viewing broadcast messages from the current record, you are looking at all of the broadcast messages, not just the ones related to the current record. If the list contains a large number of messages, use the Broadcast Search Criteria tab to limit the number of messages. For information about how to do this, see “Limiting the number of messages” on page 59. 2 To view another message, perform either of the following steps: 58 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 59.
    User’s Guide !When viewing from the main console, close the View Broadcasts dialog box, select the broadcast message you want to view from the table, then click View. ! When viewing from the current record, in the broadcast messages table, click the message you want to view. The message details appear. Creating or modifying a broadcast message To create or modify a broadcast message from the View Broadcasts dialog box, click either Create or Modify. Both actions open the New/Modify Broadcast dialog box. ! If you are creating a new message, follow the instructions provided in Creating reminders ! 59 “Creating broadcast messages” on page 55. ! If you are modifying the message, edit the fields according to the changes you want to make. Click Save when you finish making your changes. Limiting the number of messages When viewing broadcast messages from the current record, you can limit the number of messages that appear in the Broadcast table by opening the Broadcast Search Criteria tab and defining a set of criteria that filters out messages that do not match. " To limit the number of messages 1 From the Incident Management console, open an incident. 2 Click the Broadcast Search Criteria tab. This tab contains search fields where you can specify criteria to reduce the number of broadcast messages displayed in the table. 3 Complete the fields in the tab. To return the smallest number of broadcast messages, complete as many of the fields as possible. 4 When you finish specifying the search criteria, click Search.
  • 60.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Sending pages and email messages Incident Management gives you two methods of sending messages to either individuals or organizations: ! Pages ! Email This section describes how to send both types of messages manually. Note: Notification messages to individuals, based on incident assignments and other events, can be sent by the application as pages or emails. For information about configuring notification to be sent as pager or email messages, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. Paging a person or on-call group You can page individuals or the on-call member of a group about the current record using the Incident Management Paging System feature. " To page a person or an on-call group 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident from which you want to send the page. 2 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Paging System. The Paging System dialog box appears. 60 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 61.
    User’s Guide Sendingpages and email messages ! 61 Figure 2-15: Paging System dialog box 3 Select either: ! Page By Person—To page an individual. ! Page By On-Call Group—To page the on-call member of a specified group. 4 Select the recipient. To do this, complete the fields in the Search Criteria area, then click Search. When the search finishes, click the recipient’s name in the search results table, then click Select. If you are sending a page to a person (instead of an on-call group) and need help determining the correct person, you can see more information about an individual by selecting his or her name from the list, then clicking View. This opens the People form, which contains detailed information about the recipient. 5 Complete the fields in the Paging Information area, as follows, then click Send Page Now.
  • 62.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 ! Pager Service Provider—Select the recipient’s pager service provider from the list. If you are sending a page to a person, you can find this information by selecting the person’s name from the search results list, then clicking View (as described in step 4). When the People form appears, click the Notifications tab and look for the Pager Service Provider field. Note: To learn more about the service provider, click the button with the globe icon beside the field to open a link that takes you to the service provider’s website. This link is configured by your administrator, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. ! Pager Type—The application populates this field automatically, using information about the recipient already in the application. ! Pager Number—The application auto-populates this field with the pager’s telephone number, when possible. If the pager number is unavailable to the application, you must enter the pager number manually. See Manual Pager Number. ! Pager Email—If the pager has an email address, type it here. If you are sending the page to a person, this information is available on the Notifications tab, as described previously. ! Manual Pager Number—If the pager’s telephone number is not available automatically from the paging system, type the pager’s telephone number here. ! Alphanumeric Pager Message or Numeric Pager Message—Type your message in this field. Be aware that only one of these fields is enabled, depending on the type of pager the recipient carries. 62 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 63.
    User’s Guide Sendingpages and email messages ! 63 Sending email You can send messages about the current record using the Incident Management Email System. You can use this function to send email to any valid email address. This might include an SMS recipient or wireless PDA user, if you can send email to the device. " To send an email message 1 From the Incident Management console, open the incident from which you want to send an email message. 2 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Email System. The Email System dialog box appears. Figure 2-16: Completed Email System dialog box
  • 64.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 3 Indicate the recipient by selecting one of the following options: ! Current Contact—When you open the Email System form, if there is a current contact assigned to the record, the contact’s name with contact information appears in the table and is the default recipient. ! Current Assignee—To select the current assignee, click Select Current Assignee. The current assignee’s name with contact information appears in the table. 4 To select another recipient, perform the following steps: a Complete the fields in the People Search Criteria area. b Click Search. c When the search finishes, select the recipient’s name in the search results table. If you need help determining the correct name in the list, you can see more information about an individual by selecting their name from the list, then clicking View. This opens the People form, which contains detailed information about the recipient. 5 Complete the email information fields. See the list that follows for a description of the fields. ! Internet Email—This displays the recipient’s email address. When you select the email recipient, as described in steps 3 and 4, the internet email address updates from the people record. ! Email Subject Line—By default, the subject line contains the incident ID number, to which you can append text or over-type. ! Email Message Body—You type the message text here. A series of buttons, to the right of the Email Message Body field, lets you automatically insert text from the record into the message text; these buttons let you insert the following values: ! Status ! Summary ! Details ! Resolution 64 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 65.
    User’s Guide Note:If one or more of these buttons appear disabled, it means the corresponding field in the record contains no information. ! Email Attachment—You can attach a file to the email message (you are limited to just one attachment). To do this, right-click inside the Email Attachment table, then click Add. The Add Attachment dialog box appears. Navigate to, and then select, the file you want to attach. Click Open. Details of the attached file appear in the table. Working with reports ! 65 6 Click Send Email Now. Working with reports Incident Management provides a variety of predefined reports to give you quick and easy access to information the application. You use the Report console to generate these reports. If the predefined reports return more information than you need, you can manage the scope of the report using qualifications. For information about using qualifications, see “Using qualifications to generate a report” on page 67. Important: If you use Crystal Reports software to modify the prepared reports supplied with Incident Management, Customer Support can provide only limited assistance if you have a reporting problem. In addition, there is no guarantee that problems resulting from these modifications can be solved. The standard reports included with Incident Management are designed to be used without modification. Generating a report Use this procedure to generate a standard report without using qualifications (for information about generating reports with qualifications, see “Using qualifications to generate a report” on page 67). " To generate a report 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Reports. The Report console appears.
  • 66.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 2-17: Report console 2 From the Report Name list, select the report you want to generate. Report Description Incidents by Activity Time This report lists all open incidents and 3 If you select a report that requires a date range, the date range field appears. Select a start date and end date for the report. 66 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications the amount of time since the reported date. Open Incident Volume by Assignee This bar chart displays the number of open incidents for each assignee. Resolved and Closed Incident Volume by Assignee This bar chart displays the number of resolved and closed incidents for each assignee. Group Assignment to Incidents This report lists incidents and their assigned support groups for a specified date range. Change Induced Incidents This report lists incidents that were caused by changes. Note: This report is available only if Change Management is installed.
  • 67.
    User’s Guide 4From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: ! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. ! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup Working with reports ! 67 dialog box. ! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 5 Click Run Report. Using qualifications to generate a report You can manage the scope of a report by adding qualifications to the criteria used by the report engine to generate the report content. You can tell the report to search only certain specified fields for particular values, or build advanced qualifications using field names, keywords, and operators. By saving the qualifications, you can rerun the qualified report without having to re-specify the qualifications. The following procedure describes how to create basic report qualifications from the Define Report Qualification area of the Report console. To create a report using advanced qualifications, see “Using advanced qualifications to generate a report” on page 69. " To use qualifications to generate a report 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Reports. The Report console appears.
  • 68.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 2-18: Report console 2 From the Report Name list, select the name of the report you want to generate. 3 In the Define Report Qualification area, create your qualifications from the lists. For example, to create the qualification “Cost Center = 001” select “Cost Center” from the list in the left column, select “=” from the operand list (middle column), then type “001” in the right column. You can use all five rows in the area to define qualifications. 4 To save the qualification, click Save Qualification. You are prompted to name the qualification. Note: By saving the qualification, you can rerun this report without defining the qualification again. See “Generating a report using saved qualifications” on page 70. 5 In the Qualification Name field, enter a name for your qualification, and click OK. A message appears stating that your qualification is saved. 6 Click OK. 68 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 69.
    User’s Guide Workingwith reports ! 69 The Report console reappears. 7 From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: ! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. ! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup dialog box. ! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 8 Click Run Report. Using advanced qualifications to generate a report The following procedure describes how to generate a report using advanced qualifications. " To generate a report using advanced qualifications 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Reports. The Report console appears. 2 From the Report Name list, select the name of the report you want to generate. 3 Click Advanced Qualification. The Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box appears. Figure 2-19: Advanced Qualification Builder dialog box 4 Using the buttons in the qualification builder, construct your qualification. 5 Click Save. The Report console reappears.
  • 70.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Note: By saving the qualification, you can rerun this report without defining the qualification again. See “Generating a report using saved qualifications” on page 70. 6 From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: ! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. ! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup dialog box. ! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 7 Click Run Report. Generating a report using saved qualifications You can generate a report using qualifications that you created and saved previously. " To generate a report using a saved qualification 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Reports. The Report console appears. 2 Click Select Saved Qualification. The Saved Qualifications dialog box appears. Figure 2-20: Saved Qualifications dialog box 3 Select the qualification from the table, and click Return Selected. The Report console reappears. 70 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 71.
    User’s Guide 4From the Destination list, select one of the following output destinations: ! Screen—Your report appears in a separate dialog box. ! Printer—The report is sent to the printer you specified in the Print Setup Working with reports ! 71 dialog box. ! File—The report is saved to the path and file you specify. 5 Click Run Report.
  • 72.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 72 "Chapter 2—Using functions common to all ITSM applications
  • 73.
    Chapter 3 Workingwith the Requester Working with the Requester console ! 73 console The Requester console serves as the front end for the BMC Remedy Change Management and BMC Remedy Incident Management applications. It provides an easy, user-friendly interface that allows users to quickly submit requests for change or incidents to IT through the two back-end applications. The following topics are provided: ! Requester role (page 74) ! Service Request Management users (page 74) ! Understanding the Requester console (page 76) ! Working with service requests (page 80) ! Working with service requests as the Request Master (page 91) ! Service Request form (page 98) ! Working with the Solution database (page 101) ! Viewing broadcast messages (page 102)
  • 74.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Requester role Requesters are usually employees who need assistance from the IT support staff. The requester is typically an employee in the organization who must have a change implemented or an incident resolved. Any member of your organization can be a requester. However, the user might not be an employee. Non-employees can also be requesters, since non-registered users can also submit a service request. Traditionally, after a requester made a telephone call to a central help desk, a support staff member logged the request. The BMC Remedy Incident Management and BMC Remedy Change Management applications provide user self-provisioning. Using the Requester console, requesters can submit, track, and (in some cases) resolve their own requests, and, as a result, improve the overall efficiency. Out of the box, the Change Management and Incident Management applications are preconfigured to work with the Requester console. However, the Requester console is not enabled if your organization turns off this option. The Requester console is the primary interface from where requesters can create and view their requests. From the Requester console, you can create a request and submit it to the back-end application, view previously created requests, and respond to a survey form after the request has been resolved. Service Request Management users There are currently three types of user permissions for accessing the Requester console to submit service requests: ! Request Master—This user is responsible for troubleshooting service requests. The request master can view all the requests submitted by other users and open the Service Request form directly to view the details of a record. This user is more of an administrator, than a support user. ! Registered User—This user has a record in the People form, and the user’s AR login information is in the Login/Access Details tab of the People form or in the AR System User form. ! Unknown User—All other users are considered to be unknown users even if the user has a record in the People form. If a user’s login information does not exist in the People record, then the user is considered a unknown user. 74 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 75.
    User’s Guide Important:For unknown users who do not have an AR System login to be able to access the Requester console, the AR System server option “Allow Guest User” option must be turned on. The Allow Guest User option is available only when the server is set to single-tenancy mode. Also the AR Submitter locked mode must be enabled for users with read-only license to respond to surveys. The Incident Management and Change Management applications must also set up a default People record with a valid AR System login to be used for unknown users. For more information, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. If a user meets any of the following conditions, the user type is “unknown user”: ! The user has entries in the People form and in the AR System User form, but does not have an AR System Login ID in the People form. ! The user has an entry in the People form, but has neither an entry in the AR System User form nor an AR System Login ID in the People form. This type of user is also an AR System Guest User. ! The user does not have an entry in the People form, but has an entry in the Service Request Management users ! 75 AR System User form. ! The user does not have an entry in the People form or in the AR System User form. This type of user is also an AR System Guest User. Some other factors that control allowing unknown users access to the Requester console follow: ! Unknown users are not allowed access if the multi-tenancy option is turned on. Multi-tenancy provides restricted access of data from different companies or business units. This feature makes it possible to host multiple companies and their data on a single server. Multi-tenancy is limited to the company level. Configuration can differ on a per-company basis. Multi-tenancy from the user’s perspective is accessed by selecting the appropriate company from the list next to the Company field. The Tenancy Mode has to be set by a user with administrator and general access permissions on the System Settings form. For more information about ITSM foundation settings, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide.
  • 76.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 ! In addition to setting the Tenancy Mode to Single-Tenancy, the Allow Unknown Users option must be set to Yes and the login information added. This is set by a user with Request Config permissions on the Application Settings form. ! Unknown users are only allowed within the Requester console framework, which means that if the Change or Incident form is directly accessed, it does not allow unknown users. Understanding the Requester console The Requester console serves as the front end to the Change Management and Incident Management applications. Figure 3-1: Requester console The console is the entry point for users to create, view, update, or cancel their own service requests. For more information about the Requester console, see the following topics: ! Opening the Requester console (page 77) ! Functional areas and tasks (page 78) 76 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 77.
    User’s Guide Understandingthe Requester console ! 77 Opening the Requester console You can view the Requester console through the BMC Remedy User client or through a browser. See the following instructions for information about opening the Requester console. " To open the Requester console from BMC Remedy User 1 Log in to BMC Remedy User using your AR System Login information. Unknown or guest users need to log in using the default set up by their company. 2 From the IT Home page, click Requester console. The Requester console appears. 3 Create, view, modify, print, or cancel a request as needed. For more information, see “Working with service requests” on page 80. " Using a browser to open the Requester console 1 To open the Requester console from a browser, type the following URL in to your browser’s address bar: http://<web_server>:<port>/arsys/apps/<arsystem_server>/Home Page where: <web_server> is the fully qualified name of the BMC Remedy Mid Tier system, specified in the format server_name.company.com. <port> is an optional port number, which is needed if the web server is not on the default port (port 80). <arsystem_server> is the name of your BMC Remedy AR System server. For a list of supported browsers, see the compatibility matrix at: http://supportweb.remedy.com/Rem/IssuesAndSolutions/ CompatibilityMatrix/index.jsp 2 Enter your user name and password, then click Login. 3 When the IT Home page opens, click the Requester Console link in the navigation pane.
  • 78.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Functional areas and tasks The Requester console has the following functional areas. Console Area Function View Requests Use the View Requests links to filter the requests in the Requests table. Requests can be sorted by the following options: ! Open ! All For more information, see “Filtering service requests” on page 83. General Functions Use the General Functions links to do the following actions: ! Update the information in your requests, by creating a new work info entry. See “Modifying a service request” on page 85. ! Search for requests by Request ID. See “Searching for service requests by Request ID” on page 86. ! Save the console view. ! Work on a survey. See “Completing surveys” on page 88. Request Errors If you have Request Master permissions, the Request Errors function appears in the navigation pane. For more information, see “Viewing service requests with errors” on page 90. Refresh button Refreshes the Broadcasts and My Requests tables. Click Refresh to refresh the data in the tables. Broadcasts Displays broadcasts or bulletin board messages. The View button displays the selected broadcast in a dialog box, from where you can view details about the broadcast. Note: No internal broadcast messages appear in the Requester console. For more information, see “Viewing broadcast messages” on page 102. 78 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 79.
    User’s Guide Understandingthe Requester console ! 79 Console Area Function Create a New Request button Click this button to display the New Request wizard, from where you can create a new service request. For more information, see “Creating a service request” on page 80. My Requests Displays the requests submitted by the logged in user. When performing Request form searches, only administrators and users who have Request Master permissions can view other users’ submitted requests. Request Details Displays details about the request that is selected from the My Requests table. View button Displays the record that is selected from the My Requests table. For more information, see “Viewing a service request record” on page 84. Print button Prints the record that is selected from the My Requests table. For more information, see “Printing a service request” on page 86 Cancel button Cancels the service request that is selected from the My Requests table. For more information, see “Canceling a service request” on page 87. Reopen button Lets you reopen requests that are in Completed or Rejected state. For more information, see “Reopening a service request” on page 87. Close button Closes the console window.
  • 80.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Working with service requests The following topics are provided: ! “Creating a service request” on page 80 ! “Filtering service requests” on page 83 ! “Viewing a service request record” on page 84 ! “Modifying a service request” on page 85 ! “Printing a service request” on page 86 ! “Canceling a service request” on page 87 ! “Reopening a service request” on page 87 ! “Completing surveys” on page 88 Creating a service request You can create service requests from the New Request wizard, which is the recommended way to create a service request. The New Request wizard is a simplified user interface for submitting your service requests. You can also create service requests from the Change and Incident forms. A user with Request Master permissions can directly open the SRM:Request form from the File > Open > Object List menu to view service requests. However, service requests cannot be created from the SRM:Service Request form. For more information about the Service Request form and the role of the Request Master, see “Working with service requests as the Request Master” on page 91. " To create a service request 1 From the Requester console, click Create a New Request. The New Request wizard appears. 80 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 81.
    User’s Guide Workingwith service requests ! 81 Figure 3-2: New Request wizard Pay careful attention to the following items for the Requester section: ! If you are a registered user, the fields in the Requester section are populated from the user’s People record. All the fields are read-only, except the Phone and Email fields, which are editable. ! If you are an unknown user, the First Name and Last Name fields are pre-populated with their login information. The Company is pre-populated with the single-tenancy company name. Unknown users must enter information in the Phone and Email. 2 Complete the required fields: Note: Required field names are in bold with an asterisk. You must enter information in the required fields to be able to successfully submit the request. a Select a definition from the Summary list that best describes your issue from the Summary list.
  • 82.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 If the list does not list the specific request you want to log, enter a summary of the request manually in the Summary field. Note: Manually entering a summary or “ad hoc request” always creates an incident request if Incident Management is installed. If Incident Management is not installed, a change request is created. If you select a summary definition that is an incident, then related solution database entries appear in the Possible Solutions table, based on the categorization of the summary. Possible solutions do not appear for manually entered summaries. Important: The Possible Solutions table appears only if the Problem Management application is installed. If a matching solution appears and you choose to use this solution, the solution entry is related your request and the request is resolved automatically. See “Working with the Solution database” on page 101. b Select an Urgency level for your request from the list. c If you do not have a record in the People form, then the Company, First Name and Last Name fields might not be populated, but you must complete them. 3 (Optional) Click Add Attachment to enter request work information. You can include a note or an attachment. For more information about the Request Work Info dialog box, see “Modifying a service request” on page 85. 4 Complete the optional fields: ! Date Required—Enter a date by when you require that this request be completed. ! Phone—Enter or edit your phone number. ! Email—Enter or edit your email address. Note: Unknown users must enter information in the Phone or Email fields 5 Click Save to save the request. 82 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 83.
    User’s Guide TheNew Request wizard closes, and the request you just saved appears in the My Requests table. Service request states For changes and incidents, the My Request table console lists the status of its underlying service request. Users are notified whenever a service request undergoes a status change, for example, when a service request is moved from In Progress to Completed after an incident or a change request reaches the Completed state. The notification method is always by email. Working with service requests ! 83 Filtering service requests When registered and unknown users access the Requester console, they can see a list of only their own service requests. " To filter your service requests 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 Filter your service requests by clicking the appropriate link from the View Requests section, located on the left navigation pane of the Requester console. The options are: ! Open—Displays all your open requests. This is the default view. You can choose to change the default view by selecting another sort option, then clicking Save As Default View. ! All—Displays all your requests. The My Requests table displays the requests that fall under the selected status.
  • 84.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Viewing a service request record From the Requester console, you can view your submitted service requests. The My Requests table displays only the requests that the logged in user has submitted. Change requests are prefixed with CRQ and Incident requests are prefixed by INC. " To view a service request record 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 If necessary, sort the service requests to display the ones that you want to view, as described in “Filtering service requests” on page 83. 3 From the My Requests table, select the service request record that you want to view. 4 View some details of the record in the Request Details section of the console. Figure 3-3: Request Details 5 Click View to display the record. ! To update the service request, see “Modifying a service request” on page 85. ! To print the service request record, see “Printing a service request” on page 86. ! To cancel a submitted service request, see “Canceling a service request” on page 87. 6 Click Close. 1. Select a record. 2. View some details in the Request Details section. 3. Click View to display the record in the Request Details window. 84 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 85.
    User’s Guide Workingwith service requests ! 85 Modifying a service request There are limited updates you can make to your service request after you have submitted it. You can make only the following changes: ! Cancel the request—See “Canceling a service request” on page 87. ! Update the work information—See “To update the work information of a service request” on page 85. ! Reopen the request—You can reopen a service request, but only when it is advanced to a certain state. For information, see “Reopening a service request” on page 87. " To update the work information of a service request 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 From the list of your requests in the My Requests table, select the record that you want to modify. 3 Perform one of the following actions: ! Click the Add Work Info link from the Console Functions section on the left navigation pane. ! Click View, click the Work Info tab, and then click Add Work Info. The Request Work Info dialog box appears. Figure 3-4: Request Work Info dialog box 4 Enter a summary of the work log in the Summary field.
  • 86.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 5 Optionally, you can do the following steps: a Enter additional information in the Notes field. b Add an attachment. You are limited to one attachment for each work information entry. If you need to add multiple attachments, you can add multiple work information entries. 6 Click Save. Searching for service requests by Request ID You can quickly search for a service request by its Request ID. " To search by Request ID 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 Click Search by Request ID. 3 Enter the complete Request ID or the numeric part of the ID. The matching request appears in the My Requests table. Printing a service request To enable the print functionality, be sure to follow steps 1 through 4. " To print a service request 1 Log in to BMC Remedy User with your server name in the Preference Server field. 2 Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box appears. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Make sure that ODBC Use Underscores is checked. 5 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 6 Select the record you want to print from the My Requests table. 7 Click Print. 86 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 87.
    User’s Guide Thereport appears in the Report Preview window. 8 Review the report, and then click the Print icon on the toolbar. Working with service requests ! 87 Canceling a service request You can only cancel a service request that is open. You cannot reopen a canceled service request until it reaches the Completed or Rejected state. " To cancel a service request 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 If necessary, sort the requests to show all Open requests, as described in “Filtering service requests” on page 83. 3 Select the service request record that you want to cancel. 4 Click Cancel. You are prompted if you are sure you want to cancel to request. 5 Click Yes. 6 Refresh the My Requests table, if necessary, to view the status of all your service requests. Reopening a service request You can only reopen service requests that are in the Completed or Rejected state. " To reopen a request 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 If necessary, sort the requests to show all Open requests, as described in “Filtering service requests” on page 83. 3 Select the service request record that you want to reopen. Note: The Cancel button changes to Reopen when you select a completed or rejected record.
  • 88.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 3-5: Reopening a record 4 Click Reopen. Note: You can only reopen records that are in Completed or Rejected state. The following note appears: The selected request has been reopened. 5 Click OK to dismiss the note. The request now appears as In Progress or Open. The status shown depends on whether the request is a change or an incident 1. To reopen a canceled record, select the record. 2. Click Reopen. Completing surveys You will be notified through email to respond to a survey after your service request is marked Completed. Each service request generates a separate survey. Note: Surveys must be set up for your company and the option must be turned on. If surveys are not set up and the survey option is not turned on, no surveys are generated. " To complete a survey 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 Click View Survey. 88 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 89.
    User’s Guide Workingwith service requests ! 89 The Survey dialog box appears. Figure 3-6: Survey dialog box 3 Select a survey, and then click Respond. 4 Type your responses to the questions. Figure 3-7: Requester survey 5 Click Save.
  • 90.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Viewing service requests with errors If you have Command Event Master and Request Master permissions, you can view which service requests contain errors, for example, if there is a problem with a back-end application. " To view requests with errors 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 From the navigation pane, choose Request Errors > View Requests with Errors. The Service Request form opens. It displays those service requests that contain errors of various types. Figure 3-8: Service Request form—Entries containing errors 3 To view the error status and its possible source, click the Change/Incident Data tab. 4 If you have Command Event Master permissions, click Reset Error to restart the service request. 90 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 91.
    User’s Guide Userscan now continue to work on the service request. 5 If you have Command Event Master permissions, click View Events to review the event log and troubleshoot the service request. For more information, see “Viewing the event log and troubleshooting” on page 97. Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 91 6 Save any changes. Working with service requests as the Request Master Only users with Request Master permissions can access the Service Request form directly. All other users need to use the New Request wizard to create service requests. The Service Request form is accessed by the Request Master users to troubleshoot system errors. See “Opening a service request record” on page 92. For information about the Service Request form, see “Service Request form” on page 98. Request Masters can do the following actions with the Service Request form: ! Add Work Info entries for service requests—See “To view or add work information” on page 94. ! Use the accelerator links on the navigation pane to reopen a request, cancel a request, and so on—See “Canceling a service request” on page 87 and “Reopening a service request” on page 87. ! View the event log if a service request event has failed or is in error state, and either retry the event or ignore the event—See “To view the event log” on page 97. Note: The Request Master user must have Request Master permissions. Request Masters, however, cannot directly update any other form fields. Only users with AR System Administrator permissions are allowed to delete service request records. Important: Delete service requests with caution. They cannot be recovered.
  • 92.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Opening a service request record Note: Only Request Masters can directly access the Service Request form. This user needs Request Master and Command Event Master permissions. Figure 3-9: Service Requests form Note: Request Masters can view records that they have access to, granted by company access in the People form. Request Masters with unrestricted access (that is, they have access to all companies) can view all service requests, as can the AR System administrator. " To open a service request record 1 Log in to the AR System. 2 Choose File > Open > Object List. The Object List dialog box appears. 3 Click the Find tab. 4 Enter Service Request in the Search what keywords? field, and then click Find. 92 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 93.
    User’s Guide 5Select the service request entry, and click Search. Note: New service requests are created from the Service Request console, using the New Request wizard. If you try to select the service request entry and click New, you get an error message. The Service Requests form appears in Search mode. For more information about the service request form, see “Service Request form” on page 98. 6 Enter search criteria, and then click Search. 7 Select the service request record you want to view or troubleshoot from the Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 93 search results. 8 Follow these steps as needed: ! “Reopening a service request” on page 93 ! “Viewing or adding work information” on page 94 ! “Viewing the event log and troubleshooting” on page 97 9 Click Save. Reopening a service request You can reopen a completed or rejected service request. You can cancel a Pending, In Progress, or Staged request. " To reopen or cancel a request 1 Complete steps 1 through 7 from the procedure “To open a service request record” on page 92. 2 On the appropriate record, take the appropriate action: ! Click Reopen Request if you need to reopen a completed or rejected request. ! Click Cancel Request if you need to cancel a request. Note: The appropriate action link is enabled, depending on the state of the service request.
  • 94.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 The service request shown has a Status of Completed, so the Reopen Request link is enabled. Figure 3-10: Service Request form—Completed Status Reopen Request action is enabled when Status is set to Completed. 3 Click OK to dismiss the confirmation message. ! If you clicked Reopen Request, the Status changes to New, Staged, or In Progress. ! If you clicked Cancel Request, the Status changes to Canceled. 4 Click Save to save your changes. Viewing or adding work information You can quickly add to the Work Info dialog box of an existing service request by clicking View Work Info or Add Work Info from the left navigation pane. " To view or add work information 1 Do steps 1 through 7 from the procedure “To open a service request record” on page 92. 2 Click the appropriate link: ! View Work Info—Displays the Request Work Info dialog box and existing work information. Select the entry in the History table that you want to view, and view its details. (The View Work Info link is enabled only if there is existing information for the selected record.) 94 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 95.
    User’s Guide Figure3-11: Request Work Info dialog box ! Add Work Info—Displays the Request Work Info dialog box and allows you to add information. See “Adding or viewing work information from a service request” on page 95. 3 Click Save to save your changes. Adding or viewing work information from a service request The Request Work Info dialog box has a different view when the Request Master opens it from the Service Request form than when the user accesses it from the Requester console. " To add or view work information from a service request 1 Complete steps 1 and 2 from the procedure “Viewing or adding work information” on page 94. The Work Info form appears. It looks slightly different, depending on whether you clicked View Work Info or Add Work Info. Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 95
  • 96.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 3-12: Request Work Info form—Adding Work Information 2 View or add information to the fields (field names in bold with asterisks are required fields). Field name Description Date+ Date and time when work information was created. Source Where work information came from, for example, Email, Summary A brief description of the Work Info entry. This character Notes A more complete description of the Work Info entry. View Access Sets the View Access to the work information. Attachments Includes any attachments that pertain to the Work Info Submitter System-generated field containing the login name of the Submit Date System-generated field that contains the date the Work 3 Click Save. Web, or some other source. field contains a maximum of 100 characters. ! Public—Lets the requester view the work information. ! Internal—Only the request master can view the work information. entry. Only one attachment can be added per Work Info entry. person who submitted the Work Info entry. Info entry was created. 96 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 97.
    User’s Guide Viewingthe event log and troubleshooting If the service request cannot be completed because of an error from the back-end application, you can review the event log and troubleshoot the service request. Overall event status is indicated by the App Event Status on the Change/Incident Data tab. Note: You need Command Event Master permissions in addition to Request Working with service requests as the Request Master ! 97 Master permissions. " To view the event log 1 Complete steps 1 through 7 from the procedure “To open a service request record” on page 92. 2 Click View Events. The Event History dialog box appears. Figure 3-13: Event History dialog box 3 View the event details: ! Protocol ! Access Mode ! Error Code ! Error Message
  • 98.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 4 Take any of the following actions for events that are in error: ! Retry ! Ignore It is best to retry each event in the order the events are created. By default, the event table is sorted with the recent event on top, in reverse chronological order. Typical events should be retried when the problem indicated by the error message has been fixed. 5 Click Close. Service Request form Only users with Request Master permissions can open the Service Request form directly and perform certain actions. For more information, see “Working with service requests as the Request Master” on page 91. Note: You cannot create a service request from this form. This section describes the form fields for reference. Field name Description Summary Summary of the request. This is populated from the New Request wizard. Requesters can select a summary definition from the Summary list. This list displays a list of summary definitions that have a status of Active. If a summary value from the Summary list is selected, the following fields are automatically completed: Category Tiers, Service Type, and Impact. Users can also enter data in the Summary field without making a selection from the Summary list. If summary data is typed in, the following values are set: ! Categorization Tiers 1 through 5 = NULL ! Impact = 3-Moderate/Limited ! Service Type = User Service Request Note: Categorization data is mapped in the Operational Catalog Setup form. 98 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 99.
    User’s Guide Fieldname Description Request ID A unique identifier for the service request. User-defined prefixes are not supported. After a service request is submitted from the New Request wizard and the appropriate back-end application entry is created, the service request Request ID is updated with the back-end application’s Request ID. This provides consistent IDs for reference across the Requester console and the back-end application. Service Request form ! 99 Category Tiers 1 through 3 Classification of the request based on the Summary. If the user does not select a summary from the preconfigured summary list, the value is set to NULL. Request Type This value is derived from the selected summary definition (each summary definition has been mapped to an appropriate request type, either change or incident). If the user does not select a summary from the preconfigured summary list, the value is set to Incident. If only Change Management is installed, the value is set to Change. Impact Impact of the request based on the selected summary definition. If the user does not select a summary from the preconfigured summary list, the value is set to 3-Moderate/Limited. This setting indicates the impact to IT operations, not the impact to the user requester. Urgency The importance of the service request to the requester: ! Urgency—Selected by the user when creating the service request. Date Required The date by which the requester requires the service request be completed. Note: This field is for informational purposes; there is no service level workflow related to this field. The only workflow associated with this field is that an error message appears if the Required Date is set to a date earlier than the current date. Notes Further details about the service request. Status The status of the service request. This is a system field (Field ID 7). All of the state transition data for SRM:Request is stored in the SYS:Status Transition form. Whenever the service request Status data is changed, SRM:Request Form workflow retrieves the appropriate entry from the SYS:Status Transition Lookup form for the previous state and current state and determines if the transition is valid.
  • 100.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Field name Description Status Reason A further description of the Status. Date Submitted The date and time the service request was submitted. This is a system-generated field. SLA Responded Service level data pushed from back-end SLM forms. If set to Yes, change request must be responded to. This is particularly important in the case of a response-time goal, where a blank SLA Responded field might indicate that the service target goal has been missed. Not applicable if SLM is not installed. Requesters tab The two tabs, Requested For and Requested By/Service Location, contain the same information, or information of the user who submitted the service request. Requested By/Service Location data is automatically copied to the Requested For fields based on the type of Submitter. ! If the Submitter is an Unknown User (a user who is not registered in the People form with an AR System Login and People ID), the Submitter's data is copied to the Requested For fields. The Requested By fields are set to default user data set in Application settings. ! If the Submitter is not an Unknown User (the user is registered in the People form with an AR System Login and People ID), the Submitter's data is copied to the Requested For as well as the Requested By fields. Only service requests for individuals are supported, so the Add Request For field is automatically set to Individual. SLM tab Displays the service targets and milestones for the restoration of the unavailability. Service targets and milestones are defined from within the Service Level Management applications. Escalations can be set up to notify the assignment group prior to acknowledgement or resolution breach times. Change/ Incident Data tab Provides information from the back-end application for the service request record. The actual back-end Change or Incident request information appears. Manager tab Provides manager information for the service request record. This value is pushed from the change or incident and indicates the owner of the request. This person is notified if the SLA is breached. The service request itself does not populate this field. Work Info tab Displays work information for the service request record. 100 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 101.
    User’s Guide Workingwith the Solution database If you are creating a service request that falls into the request type of Incident, you might be able to resolve the request immediately if a valid solution exists in the solution database. After you select a summary, possible solutions appear only if they exist in the solution database under the same category. Note: The Solutions table only appears if Incident Management and Problem Management are installed. If you have only Change Management installed, this table does not display. " To resolve an incident request by using the Solution database 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester Working with the Solution database ! 101 console” on page 77. 2 Click Create a New Request. The New Request wizard appears. 3 Select a Summary that can be classified as an incident. Figure 3-14: Possible Solutions entry
  • 102.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 If there is a solution database entry that matches the summary definition, it appears in the Possible Solutions table. 4 If the solution entry appears to be valid, select the entry and then click View. 5 Review the solution entry. 6 If the solution entry resolves your request, click Use Solution. The following AR Note appears: Your request has been submitted and will be marked Resolved. 7 Click OK to dismiss the note. The request appears in the My Requests table as Resolved. Viewing broadcast messages Broadcasts (or bulletin board messages) appear in the Broadcasts table. Broadcasts are filtered by the logged-in user’s company. If the logged-in user’s company cannot be determined, then only Global broadcasts appear. The View button opens the Broadcasts form in dialog mode, where you can see details of the broadcasts, depending on your permissions. If you have sufficient permissions on this form, you can create, modify, or delete broadcasts. For more information about working with broadcasts, see “Viewing and creating broadcast messages” on page 36. " To view broadcasts from the Requester console 1 Open the Requester console, as described in “Opening the Requester console” on page 77. 2 View the broadcasts in the Broadcasts table. 3 To refresh the list of broadcasts, click the Refresh button above the table. 4 Select a broadcast entry, and click View to view more details. 102 "Chapter 3—Working with the Requester console
  • 103.
    Chapter 4 Workingwith Incident Management as support staff This section describes functions that are available to support staff. Managers can also perform these functions from the Support Console tab. The following topics are provided: ! Understanding the Support Console tab (page 104) ! Setting application preferences (page 106) ! Recording a new incident (page 108) ! Understanding assignments (page 120) ! Investigating and diagnosing an incident (page 132) ! Resolving an incident (page 141) ! Closing an incident (page 147) ! Creating known errors and solutions (page 149) Working with Incident Management as support staff ! 103
  • 104.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Understanding the Support Console tab The Incident Management Support console tab has been redesigned for version 7.0. It includes: ! Navigation pane—Provides display filters, links to functionality, and links to other applications. ! Search Criteria area—Provides area where you can search for assigned work. ! Broadcast area—Displays broadcasts and provides broadcast functionality. For details, see “Broadcasting messages” on page 55. ! Assigned Work area—Displays a summary of assigned incidents. The color of the incident indicates whether the response and resolution time are within the Service Level Management (SLM) agreed-upon service targets. When you select an incident, the summary details appear below it. Figure 4-1: Incident Management console—Support Console tab Navigation pane 104 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 105.
    User’s Guide Boththe navigation pane and the Search Criteria provide options to filter the Assigned Work on the console, as summarized in the following table. Table 4-1: Options to filter display of assigned work Option Explanation Company If you support multiple companies, leave this field in the navigation pane blank to display work for all companies, or select the appropriate company to display work for a single company. Console View This menu in the navigation pane provides you with options to look at the Personal view for work assigned to you, or to view work assigned to your support groups. You can display work assigned to all your support groups or to selected support groups. Status Instead of viewing All Open Incidents, you can view all incidents, or all that are pending, resolved, or closed. When you view All Open Incidents, you view incidents available for you to work on, which includes assigned, in progress, and pending incidents. SLM Status To view incidents regardless of SLM status, leave this blank. Otherwise, select the appropriate SLM status. The SLM Status filter is available only if SLM is installed. Dates You can view incidents that were opened Any Time. You can also restrict the display to incidents opened within the selected time, such as within the last 24 hours. Role You can view incidents for which you are the Assignee, the Owner, or both at the same time. Advanced search You can specify one or more values on the form to search for specific incidents. For details, see “Using the Advanced Search feature” on page 40. Understanding the Support Console tab ! 105
  • 106.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Setting application preferences You can set preferences to: ! Automatically use decision trees, if available, whenever you record a new incident. ! Set defaults for the consoles. ! Determine the action that occurs after you save an Incident form. " To set your preferences 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 From the navigation pane, choose General Functions > Application Preferences. The Application Preferences form appears. Figure 4-2: Application Preferences form 3 Update the form as appropriate. 106 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 107.
    User’s Guide Thefollowing table describes the settings available on the form. Setting Description Console View The default console view, in conjunction with the search criteria, controls which incidents appear in the Assigned Work area. You can temporarily change this setting from the navigation pane of the console. The following selections are available from this list: ! Personal—Displays incidents assigned to you. ! Selected Groups—Prompts you to select any support groups to which you belong. You can select to display all incidents assigned to your group, or incidents assigned to your group that are not yet assigned to an individual. ! All My Groups—Displays incidents assigned to all of your support groups. You can choose to display all incidents, or incidents that are not yet assigned to an individual. Manager Console If you select Yes, when you open the Incident Management console, it opens to the Manager Console tab. Otherwise, it opens to the Support Console tab. Data Set Name If there are multiple data sets, such as production and training data sets, select the appropriate data set. Setting application preferences ! 107 Search Criteria Default Search criteria, in conjunction with the console view, control which incidents appear in the Assigned Work area. You can temporarily change these settings from the Search Criteria area on the console. You can set the default values for the following settings: ! Incident status—Select whether to display open, pending, resolved, closed, or all incidents. Open incidents include assigned, in progress, and pending incidents. ! SLM status—Select whether to display incidents with no service target assigned, within the service target, with a service target breached, or with all service targets breached. Clear this selection to display incidents regardless of SLM status. ! Role—Select whether to display incidents where you are the assignee, the owner, or either. ! Task status—This selection controls which tasks are displayed on the Tasks tab of the console. Select whether to display open tasks, closed tasks, or all tasks.
  • 108.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Setting Description After New Save This setting controls the action after you click Save on the Enable Auto- Decision Tree Tab Views You can choose whether to show the Vendor, Financials, or Overview Console 4 Click Save. Incident form. The following selections are available from this list: ! No Action—Leaves the Incident form open and it is ready for you to record a new incident. ! Reopen in New—Opens the current incident in modify mode in a new window. The original window is ready for you to record a new incident. ! Reopen in Current—Leaves the Incident form open. If this is a new incident, the form changes from New to Modify. If you select Yes from this list and a decision tree is set up, you are prompted by the decision tree when you record a new incident. For more information about decision trees, see “Using the decision tree” on page 114. Date System tabs. You can choose whether to show incidents or incident tasks on the Overview console. For information about the Overview console, see “Working with the Overview console” on page 31. Recording a new incident This activity is the starting point of the Incident Management process. The purpose of this activity is to accurately record and recognize disruptions to services provided by IT to its customers. When recording a new incident, you classify the incident and record customer information, configuration item (CI) information, and a description of the incident. The key to this activity is the accuracy and completeness of the information recorded. This section describes several tools to assist you in recording a new incident: ! “Using the Process Flow Status wizard to record a new incident” on page 109 ! “Using a template” on page 112 ! “Using the decision tree” on page 114 ! “Using scripts” on page 114 108 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 109.
    User’s Guide Thissection also describes activities you might need to perform while recording a new incident: ! “Relating incidents as duplicates” on page 114 Recording a new incident ! 109 ! “Recording CI unavailability” on page 116 ! “Adding or modifying a customer profile” on page 117 Using the Process Flow Status wizard to record a new incident By using the Process Flow Status wizard when recording a new incident, you are prompted to enter the required fields and optional recommended fields to move the incident to the next stage. Tip: The Process Flow Status wizard provides one method of recording and updating incidents. All fields in the dialog box are also available on the Incident form. You can complete these fields directly from the form, if you prefer. " To record an incident with the Process Flow Status wizard 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 From the navigation pane, choose General Functions > New Incident. The New Incident form appears. 3 In the Process Flow Status area, click the arrow in the Identification and Recording box. 4 Choose Next Stage > Investigation and Diagnosis. You can move directly to the Resolution and Recovery stage or the Incident Closure Stage by selecting the appropriate stage.
  • 110.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 4-3: Selecting the next stage from the Process Flow Status wizard The Create Incident form appears. The two tabs on this form prompt you to enter required and optional information. Note: This is a dynamic form. The fields on the Required and Optional tabs depend on the information to move from the current stage or state to the selected stage or state. Figure 4-4: Create Incident form displaying completed Required Information tab 5 Type the customer’s last name in the Last Name field and press ENTER. 110 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 111.
    User’s Guide Ifthere are multiple customers with the same last name, you are prompted to select the appropriate customer. The Company, First Name, and Phone Number fields are completed from the customer record. The company drives the selection on other menus, such as Operational, Product, and Resolution Categorization. 6 Type a brief description in the Summary field. 7 You can type additional details in the Notes field. 8 Select values from the Impact and Urgency lists. 9 If appropriate, select a different service company. When you select the customer, the service company is set to the customer’s company. 10 If appropriate, change the service type from the default value of user service restoration. You can select user service request, infrastructure restoration, or infrastructure event. Recording a new incident ! 111 11 To enter optional recommended information: a Click the Optional Information tab. Figure 4-5: Create Incident form displaying completed Optional Information tab b Select the appropriate operational categorization.
  • 112.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Operational categorization is based on a three-tier hierarchy that is defined in the Operational Catalog configuration form. c Select the appropriate product categorization. Product categorization is based on a five-tier hierarchy that is defined in the Product Catalog configuration form. 12 Click Save. If you did not assign the incident, the incident is automatically assigned based on predefined assignment routing. If there is no appropriate predefined assignment routing, you are prompted to assign the incident. 13 If prompted, assign the incident, then click Save. Using a template You can use templates to populate the incident with standard information that is entered on a regular basis. A template can also set a relationship to a CI. Your administrator can create templates for commonly occurring incidents, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. " To use a template 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 From the navigation pane, choose General Functions > New Incident. The New Incident form appears. 3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Identification and Recording box, choose Select Template. If you belong to more than one support group, you are prompted to select the appropriate support group first. A list of templates available to your support group appears. 112 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 113.
    User’s Guide Recordinga new incident ! 113 Figure 4-6: Incident Template Selection dialog box 4 Highlight the appropriate template, then click Select. Part of the incident is completed, as defined by the template. Figure 4-7: Incident form partially completed by template 5 Complete the incident as appropriate. 6 Click Save.
  • 114.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Using the decision tree A decision tree takes you step-by-step through a questionnaire, and, based on your answers, completes part of the form for a new incident. Each element in the decision tree displays a list of items. Your final selection completes part of the incident. Decision trees are built by a manager or administrator at your company. You can set up your preferences to use available decision trees whenever you start a new incident. For details, see “Setting application preferences” on page 106. Using scripts Scripts are detailed instructions that have been set up at your company to help you record important information about an incident. You have access to scripts that have been set up for your support group. Scripts might include a list of questions to ask the customer. These questions can assist you in resolving or assigning the incident. There are two types of scripts: ! Initiator scripts—Select an initiator script when you record an incident after you indicate the customer. ! Assignment scripts—Select an assignment script when you assign or reassign an incident after you indicate the assignee. The assignment scripts correspond to the group to which you are assigning the incident. For example, a networking group might have specific questions for you to ask the user when you assign the incident. Relating incidents as duplicates You can relate an incident to another as a duplicate. The original incident resolves all of its duplicates. When someone resolves or closes the original incident, its Operational and Product Categorizations and Resolution fields are copied to the related duplicates, marking them with a status of Resolved. " To relate an incident as a duplicate 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 From the navigation pane, open an incident currently being investigated. 114 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 115.
    User’s Guide 3Click the Relationships tab. 4 From the Request Type list, select Incident, then click Search. The Incident Relationship Search dialog box appears. 5 Enter the search criteria to locate the original incident, then click Search. Incidents matching the search criteria appear on the bottom half of the form. Figure 4-8: Incident Relationship Search dialog box with results displayed 6 Select the duplicate incident. 7 If the current incident is a duplicate of the original incident, from the Recording a new incident ! 115 Relationship Type list, select Duplicate of. 8 If the current incident is the original incident, which the selected incident duplicates, from the Relationship Type list, select Original of. 9 Click Relate. The Incident Relationship Search dialog box closes. The two incidents are related as duplicate and original. The status of the duplicate incident is Pending, with a status reason of Pending Original Incident. 10 Click Save.
  • 116.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Recording CI unavailability CI unavailability is the actual down-time of a CI. You can record CI unavailability due to an unexpected circumstance from the incident. Note: You can record CI unavailability only if Asset Management is installed. " To record CI unavailability 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Relationships tab. 4 To search for a CI, choose Quick Links > CI Search. The CI Relationships Search form appears. 5 Select the CI in the CIs table. Figure 4-9: CIs table 6 In the Relationship Type field, select the relationship type. 7 Click Relate with Unavailability. Note: Relate with Unavailability is available only when you are searching for CIs to relate to an incident. The Configuration Item Unavailability form appears. 116 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 117.
    User’s Guide Recordinga new incident ! 117 Figure 4-10: Configuration Item Unavailability form 8 In the Unavailability Type list, select whether the unavailability is scheduled or unscheduled, and whether it is full or partial unavailability. 9 Select the actual start date of the unavailability. 10 Complete other fields of the form, as appropriate. 11 Click Save. 12 Close the CI Relationship Search dialog box. 13 On the Incident form, click Save. Adding or modifying a customer profile Before you can record an incident, the customer must be listed in the People database. This access is configured by your administrator, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. Adding a new customer profile If a customer is not listed in the database, you can add a customer’s profile. " To add a new customer profile 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected.
  • 118.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Contact tab. 4 Click Create. The People form appears. Figure 4-11: People form used to add a customer profile 5 Complete the required fields. You do not need to add all of the information for this individual’s profile, only what is necessary to submit the record. Note: You cannot define a Support Person record here. See the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide for further details. 6 After you have finished entering the information, click Save. The status of the person you added has a default value of Proposed. Your People/Contact administrator must verify those in proposed status, update them to Enabled, and add any other information that is necessary. 118 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 119.
    User’s Guide Modifyinga customer profile To modify a customer profile, you require access to the People database. Note: You can modify the customer and contact phone number and location on the Incident form without modifying the customer profile. A modification on the Incident form, however, applies only to the current incident. " To modify a customer profile 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is Recording a new incident ! 119 not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Search for and select a customer in the Contact Information section. 4 Click Modify. The People form appears, displaying the customer’s profile. Figure 4-12: People form used to modify a customer profile 5 Change the information, as required.
  • 120.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Accessing the individual’s People Profile this way gives you limited information that you can change. You can change the information in the top of the form and the information in the General and More Details tabs. 6 Click Save. Understanding assignments An incident can be assigned to an individual or a support group. The Assignment tab displays details of the current assignment. Version 7.0 adds tasks to Incident Management. You can attach tasks to an incident and assign them to individuals without changing the assignment of the incident. Figure 4-13: Assignment tab This section includes the following topics: ! “Receiving notification of assignments” on page 121 ! “Working with assignments” on page 121 ! “Reassigning an incident” on page 124 ! “Working with tasks” on page 127 120 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 121.
    User’s Guide Understandingassignments ! 121 Receiving notification of assignments When an incident is assigned to you, you can receive notification through: ! BMC Remedy Alert ! Email You configure how you receive each notification from the People form, as described in the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. All incidents assigned to you or your support groups appear in the Incident Management and Overview consoles. For additional information about notifications sent from Incident Management, see “Understanding notifications” on page 160. Working with assignments When you work on open incidents, you are working on incidents assigned to you or to your support group. You can also assist with an incident assigned to another support group when a task is assigned to you. This section includes the following topics: ! “Viewing incidents assigned to you” on page 121 ! “Accepting an assignment” on page 122 ! “Recording time worked on an incident” on page 122 Viewing incidents assigned to you You can view the summary and detail of incidents assigned to you. " To view incidents assigned to you 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 From the navigation pane, choose Console View > Personal.
  • 122.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 3 To view additional details about an incident, perform any of the following actions. Action Result Click the incident. The Details tab displays details about the selected incident. Click the incident, then click View. The Incident form appears, displaying the incident. You can modify the form and perform other actions, as appropriate. Accepting an assignment You can accept any incident assigned to your support group. " To accept an assignment 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Change the Status to In Progress. 4 In the navigation pane, choose Quick Links > Assign to Me. 5 Click Save. Recording time worked on an incident On the Assignment tab, use the Current Assignee Effort Time area to track the effort time that you spend on an incident. You can enter the time in the Effort Time Spent Minutes field, or you can use the automatic timer. Your total effort time is then saved in the Assignment Log. If you are not assigned to an incident, you can record that you have assisted with the incident. The Total Time Spent Minutes field displays the total effort time spent on the incident per session. " To record time worked on an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 122 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 123.
    User’s Guide Understandingassignments ! 123 3 Click the Assignment tab. 4 Click Update Assignment Log. The Incident Assignment Log dialog box appears. Figure 4-14: Incident Assignment Log dialog box 5 Complete the form as appropriate. You can change the Effort Time Spent (Minutes) field for your own assignment logs, but not for those of other support groups or individuals. Alternatively, you can use the automatic timer while you perform work. While an incident is assigned to you, effort time is being tracked by the application. To stop the clock when you are not working on the incident, click Stopped on the Assignment tab. To restart the clock, click Start. 6 Click Add to save your total effort time in the assignment log. Note: Nobody can delete a completed assignment log.
  • 124.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Reassigning an incident You can reassign an incident to either an individual or a support group. You can also assign an incident to a vendor. Use the shortcut in the navigation pane to reassign an incident to yourself (Assign to Me) or to reassign an incident based on automatic routing (Auto Assign). " To reassign an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 To assign the incident to yourself, in the navigation pane, choose Quick Links > Assign to Me. Figure 4-15: Navigation pane links to assign incidents 4 To reassign the incident based on automatic routing, in the navigation pane, choose Functions > Auto Assign. This assigns the incident based on predefined mapping. Automated assignment can be based on the customer organization, incident location, operational categorization, or product categorization. 5 Otherwise, follow these steps to reassign the investigation. a Click the Assignment tab. b Reassign the investigation. You have several options available, as follows: ! Select the Assigned Group from the list. ! After selecting an Assigned Group, select the Assignee from the list. Click here to assign an incident to yourself. Click here to reassign the incident based on automatic routing. 124 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 125.
    User’s Guide !Select from Set Assignment using, as indicated in the following table. Set Assignment using Description My Default Group Assigns the incident to you and your default group. My Group List Opens a list of all groups to which you belong. Select the appropriate group from this list. Favorite Groups Assigns the incident to the typical groups to which your support group assigns incidents. Auto Assign The same as the Auto Assign link in the navigation pane, this assigns the incident based on predefined mapping. Current Owner Resets the incident assignee to the incident owner. For example, if several people have worked to resolve the incident, you might assign the incident back to the owner to communicate the resolution to the customer. For details on the default value for the Incident owner, see “Understanding incident ownership.” 6 Click Save. Understanding incident ownership Incident ownership is set when the incident is submitted. The incident owner depends on the support group membership of the person submitting the incident, as well as the support group being assigned the incident. For example, consider the following three support groups: ! Support Group A has a support group role of Help Desk. Person A is in Understanding assignments ! 125 Support Group A. ! Support Group B does not have a support group role of Help Desk; for example, it might have a support group role of Tier 2. Person B is in Support Group B. ! Support Group C does not have a support group role of Help Desk; for example, it might have a support group role of Tier 3.
  • 126.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Based on these support groups, the following example events show how the incident owner is set: ! Person A submits an incident. Because Person A is a member of a support group with the role of Help Desk, ownership of the incident is set to Support Group A, regardless of who is assigned this incident. ! Person B submits an incident and assigns it to Support Group A. Ownership of the incident is set to Support Group A because the group has the role of Help Desk. ! Person B submits another incident, and assigns the incident to Support Group C. Support Group B becomes the owner, because Person B is the submitter. Assigning an incident to a vendor When you work with a vendor to resolve an incident, you can indicate that the incident is assigned to the vendor. The following procedure is used to track incidents that require vendor support. " To assign an incident to a vendor 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Vendor tab. Figure 4-16: Vendor tab 4 To assign the incident to a vendor support group, select the vendor company, organization, and group. 126 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 127.
    User’s Guide Note:If you select a vendor company, organization, and group, the application sends email notification to the vendor. Otherwise, you must must communicate with the vendor as appropriate. 5 If you selected the vendor from the menus, you can press ENTER in either of the vendor name fields to select the vendor contact. If the vendor is not listed, you can type the vendor contact information. If you type the vendor contact, the Vendor Email field is for information only; Incident Management does not send email to this contact. 6 Enter any other information you need to track, such as the vendor incident Understanding assignments ! 127 number. 7 Click Save. The Vendor Assignment Status field is set to Assigned. The Reported to Vendor Date is set to the current date and time, if you did not specify otherwise. Working with tasks You can assign tasks to one or more people without changing the assignment of the incident. Creating tasks You can create tasks for open incidents, as appropriate. " To create a task 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Tasks tab. The Tasks tab displays tasks associated with the incident.
  • 128.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 4-17: Tasks tab 4 Click Create. The Task form appears. Figure 4-18: Completed Task form 5 Type a brief description of the task in the Name field. The task name appears in the summary on the Tasks tab, as well as in notification messages. 6 Type a detailed summary of the task to be performed in the Summary field. 7 Complete other fields on the form, as appropriate. 8 To record work information for this task: a On the General tab, click Create Work Info. 128 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 129.
    User’s Guide Understandingassignments ! 129 The Work Info form appears. Figure 4-19: Completed Work Info form b Complete the form, as described in “Adding work information” on page 51. c Click Save. 9 Click Save again. The task is assigned based on the location and organization. Notification is sent to the task assignee. Manually assigning a task You can manually set the assignment for any task, if appropriate. " To assign a task 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open a task, as described in “Creating tasks” on page 127. 3 On the Task form, click the Assignments tab. If you manually assign the task when creating the task, the Assignment and Dates tabs are combined as the Assignment/Dates tab.
  • 130.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 4-20: Completed Assignment tab Figure 4-21: Completed Assignment/Dates tab 4 Select the company, organization, assignee group, and assignee. 5 If appropriate, schedule the start and end dates. 6 Click Save. Recording work performed on tasks You might be assigned tasks to perform for incidents not assigned to you. When a task is assigned to you, notification is sent to you. " To record work performed on a task 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Tasks tab. 4 Select the task. 5 Click View. The Task form appears. 130 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 131.
    User’s Guide Understandingassignments ! 131 Figure 4-22: Assigned task 6 Select the appropriate status. Tasks can be staged, assigned, pending, work in progress, waiting, closed, or bypassed. Note: The waiting status is used only for automatic tasks, which are not applicable to incident management. 7 Select the appropriate status reason. If you close the task, you must select whether you are canceling the task or completing it as a success or failure. 8 Click the Assignment tab. Figure 4-23: Tracking effort on the Assignment tab
  • 132.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 9 To track effort spent on the task: ! When you start working on the task, click Start Clock. ! When you stop working on the task, click Stop Clock. ! To record additional details about the effort, to manually record time spent working on a task, or to view details of past effort, click Effort Log. The Task Effort Log dialog box appears. Close the dialog box when you are finished. 10 Click the Work Info tab. 11 Complete the Work Info tab, as described in “Adding work information” on page 51. 12 Click Save. Investigating and diagnosing an incident In this activity, you search existing information to identify a possible solution. After you identify the possible solution, you can resolve it, as described in “Resolving an incident” on page 141. If the incident cannot be resolved or a root cause analysis is required, the incident can be escalated to Problem Management. You can launch a problem investigation in conjunction with the incident to discover the root cause and solution. Keep in mind that the incident is managed as a separate process, and remains open until it is resolved. The following topics describe work you might perform while investigating and diagnosing an incident: ! “Viewing an incident” on page 133 ! “Adding work information” on page 51 ! “Searching for a solution” on page 135 ! “Recording the cost of working on an incident” on page 139 132 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 133.
    User’s Guide Investigatingand diagnosing an incident ! 133 Viewing an incident You can view an incident from the Assigned Work area. " To view an incident 1 In the Assigned Work area, select the incident. 2 Click View. The Incident form appears. Figure 4-24: Incident at investigation and diagnosis stage Fields on the form display the incident status and information that has been collected about the incident. Process flow status As the incident moves through its life cycle, the Process Flow Status area displays the current stage of the incident. In Figure 4-24 the incident is at the second stage, which is the investigation and diagnosis stage. The stage is highlighted in white and includes the label Normal. If the incident were pending further action, the current stage would be highlighted in yellow and include the label Pending. For more information about the incident process flow, see “Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request” on page 24.
  • 134.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Service Level Management (SLM) If SLM is installed, the Incident form displays both overview and in-depth information about the incident in relation to applicable service targets. The SLM Status area shows whether the incident breaches service targets defined in SLM, as described in Table 4-2. An incident can have service targets for response time and resolution time. Table 4-2: Service targets indicator colors and SLM status Color SLM status Description Green Within the Service Target Incident does not violate the If the incident was recorded directly from an email, fax, voicemail, or web self-serve request, the Responded field appears next to the Service Target indicator. After you respond to the incident, select Yes. Important: If you respond to an incident and leave the Responded field set to No, the incident might breach the response service terms. For additional information about the relevant service targets, click the SLM tab. The Service Targets table displays all service targets applicable to the incident. Select a service target to see the status, next target date, exception details, and applicable milestones. Figure 4-25: SLM tab 134 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff conditions of the service targets. Yellow Service Target Breached At least one service target has been breached. Red All Service Targets Breached The terms of all service targets have been breached. Gray No Service Target Assigned Incident has no applicable service targets.
  • 135.
    User’s Guide TheNext Target Date field indicates the next deadline out of all the service targets attached to the incident. The SLM Status displays the status corresponding to the Service Target indicator on the top of the form. If the service terms have been breached, select the breach reason and breach exception. For more information about service targets and milestones, see the BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User’s Guide. Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 135 Searching for a solution You can search for information that might help resolve the current incident. You can search for this information in other incidents, problem investigations, known errors, and solution database entries. " To search for a solution 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Incident Matching. The Incident Matching dialog box appears. 4 Select the appropriate check boxes to search for incidents, problem investigations, known errors, or solution database entries. 5 To search using the incident’s operational categorization, in the Search By Operational Categorization area, click Current Operation. The operational categorization fields populate with the current incident’s operational categorization. 6 To search using the incident’s product categorization, in the Search By Product Categorization area, click Current Product. The product categorization fields populate with the current incident’s product categorization. 7 To further filter the search results, you can specify the other fields in the search criteria pages. 8 Click Search.
  • 136.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Matching incidents, problem investigations, known errors, and solutions are listed in the tabs at the bottom half of the dialog box. Figure 4-26: Incident Matching dialog box displaying search results 9 To view details of a matching record, perform the following steps: a On the bottom half of the screen, click the appropriate tab, such as the Known Errors tab. This tab lists matching records, such as matching known errors. b Select the appropriate record. c On the top half of the screen, click the appropriate Search and Solution tab, such as the Known Error Search and Solution tab, then within that tab click the solution tab, such as the View Known Error Solution tab. This tab displays details of the selected record. 10 If the record resolves the current incident, from the Relationship Type list, select Resolved by. 11 To relate the record and copy the solution to the resolution of the incident, click Relate with Solution. 136 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 137.
    User’s Guide 12Alternatively, to relate the record without the solution, click Relate Without Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 137 Solution. 13 If a solution or work-around is available, then continue with “Moving the incident to the resolution stage.” Moving the incident to the resolution stage When you find a possible solution or work-around for the incident, you are ready to move it to the resolution stage. " To move the incident to the resolution stage 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Investigation and Diagnosis box, choose Next Stage > Resolution and Recovery. Figure 4-27: Selecting resolution and recovery . The Modify Incident form appears, displaying the required and optional fields to move the incident to the resolution and recovery stage.
  • 138.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 4-28: Completed required fields on Modify Incident form 4 If the incident is not assigned, the Modify Incident form also prompts you to assign the incident. 5 Type the proposed resolution in the Resolution field. 6 Summarize the work you performed to find the proposed resolution by completing the fields in the Add Work Info area. 7 To prevent changes to this record of your work performed, change the Locked status to Yes. 8 If this incident is linked to a request, to allow the customer to see this summary of work performed, change the View Access status to External. 9 To complete recommended optional information: a Click the Optional Information tab. 138 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 139.
    User’s Guide Figure4-29: Completed optional information b Select the appropriate product categorization. Product categorization is based on a five-tier hierarchy that is defined in the Product Catalog configuration form. c Select the appropriate resolution categorization. d Click Save. Recording the cost of working on an incident You can record the cost involved in working on an incident on the Financials tab of the Incident form. " To record the cost of working on an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is Investigating and diagnosing an incident ! 139 not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Financials tab. 4 Click Create. The Costs form appears.
  • 140.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 4-30: Completed Costs form The Cost Category field is set to Incident. This indicates the form from which you are entering the charge. You cannot change this value. 5 Select the appropriate cost center code from the list. This is the code name for the business unit or organization within the company to be charged for servicing the incident. When you select the cost center code, the Company and Cost Center Name fields display the values attached to the cost center code. 6 From the Cost Classification list, select either Actual or Budget. 7 In the Related Cost field, type the rate, and select the currency from the list. 8 If appropriate, you can also: ! Select the cost type. Cost types are defined by your organization for reporting purposes. ! Enter a description. ! Select the unit type. The unit type indicates whether cost is measured as a flat rate, or in hours or minutes. If you select a unit type of hours or minutes, you must type the number of hours or minutes in the Related Units field. 140 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 141.
    User’s Guide !Enter the date the charge was incurred. If you leave this field blank, it is set Resolving an incident ! 141 to the current date when you save the cost. 9 Click Save. The totals for budgeted and actual costs appear at the bottom of the table. 10 Repeat steps 4 through 9 for each cost associated with the incident. Resolving an incident The main purpose of this activity is to resolve and recover from the service disruption to enable the customer to resume work. " To resolve an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Resolution and Recovery box, choose Next Stage > Incident Closure. The Modify Incident form appears. Figure 4-31: Modify Incident form
  • 142.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 The Resolution field shows the resolution that was proposed when the incident was moved to the resolution and recovery stage. 4 If appropriate, change the resolution. The resolution is included in the email notification sent to the customer. If you leave this field blank, you must specify the resolution categorization on the Optional Information tab. 5 Select the appropriate status reason. The status reason can indicate action required before the incident is closed. 6 In the Add Work Info area, specify the work performed to resolve the incident. 7 You can click the Optional Information tab to enter additional information as follows: a In the Resolution Product Categorization area, select from up to five lists to specify the product categorization of the underlying CI that caused the incident. The default value is the same as the incident product categorization. b In the Resolution Categorization area, select either: ! Actions taken to resolve the incident. ! Service categories of the underlying causes. 142 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 143.
    User’s Guide Resolvingan incident ! 143 Figure 4-32: Completed Optional Information tab 8 Click Save. The status of the incident is set to Resolved. If CI unavailability was created from this incident and your support group is responsible for the CI unavailability, then you are prompted to update the CI unavailability. Figure 4-33: Selecting CI unavailability to update
  • 144.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 ! To update the CI unavailability, for example, if the CI is now available, click Update. For details on CI unavailability, see “Recording CI unavailability” on page 116. ! To continue resolving the incident without updating the CI, click Close and Continue Save. ! To return to the Incident form without saving, click Close and Cancel Save. 9 If appropriate, you can complete additional fields on the Resolution tab of the Incident form as follows. Field name Description Resolution Method Method to resolve the incident, such as Service Desk assisted. Cause Cause of the incident. 10 If you complete additional fields on the Incident form, remember to click Save to save your changes. 11 If appropriate, publish the resolution into the solution database, as described in “Creating known errors and solutions” on page 149. Creating a problem investigation from an incident If you are not able to resolve the incident, you should escalate it to the problem management process. For example, root cause analysis might be required to identify the underlying problem. If you have access to Problem Management, you can create a problem investigation from an incident. If the incident is still open when the related problem investigation is completed, the assignee is notified. If the problem investigation results in a known error, the incident assignee is notified when a work-around or permanent solution is found. " To create a problem investigation from an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 144 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 145.
    User’s Guide 3In the Process Flow Status area, in the Resolution and Recovery box, choose Resolving an incident ! 145 Generate Problem. Figure 4-34: Selecting Generate Problem A Problem Investigation form appears. The Description, Impact and Urgency, Product and Service Categorization, and Resolution fields from the incident are copied to the problem investigation. A relationship is created between the problem investigation and the incident. Figure 4-35: Problem investigation generated from incident 4 Complete the Problem Investigation form. For information about recording problem investigations, see the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 5 Click Save.
  • 146.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Creating infrastructure change from an incident If infrastructure change is required to permanently resolve the incident, you should initiate the change management process. If the Change Management application is installed and you have permission to use the Change Management application, you can create an infrastructure change from an incident. If the incident is open when the change is completed, the assignee is notified. " To create infrastructure change from an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Resolution and Recovery box, choose Generate Change. A Change Request form appears. The Product and Operational Categorization are copied from the incident to the infrastructure change. A relationship is created between the change and the incident. Figure 4-36: Change generated from incident 4 Complete the Change Request form. For information about recording change requests, see the BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 5 Click Save. 146 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 147.
    User’s Guide Closingan incident ! 147 Reopening a resolved incident If the recorded resolution did not resolve the incident, you can reopen the incident. This moves the incident back to the resolution and recovery stage. Note: If the incident is closed, it can be reopened only by a support group lead or support group manager for the group that owns the incident, or by someone with Incident Master permission. " To reopen a resolved incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the Process Flow Status area in the Closure box, choose Reopen. The incident moves back to the resolution and recovery stage, and the status changes from Resolved to In Progress. Closing an incident The main purpose of this activity is to make sure that the incident has successfully restored the service to the customer and that the customer is satisfied with the outcome. When the customer agrees that the incident can be closed, review the incident record for completion and, if appropriate, create a solution database entry. If you leave an incident as resolved, after 15 days the Incident Management application closes the incident. Note: After you close an incident, it can be reopened only by a support group lead or support group manager for the group that owns the incident, or by someone with Incident Master permission. You can continue to add Work Info entries, but you cannot modify the incident. " To close an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected.
  • 148.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 2 Open an incident. 3 Review the Incident form to make sure that it is complete and accurate. Figure 4-37: Incident being reviewed for closure Optional fields include: ! Status Reason—If appropriate, select Infrastructure Change Created. ! Closure Source—This list is located on the Resolution tab. Select Support Agent. If the customer closes an incident from the Request console, this field is set to Customer. The system might be configured to close an incident a number of days after the incident is resolved; when this happens, the Closure Source value is System. ! Satisfaction Rating—Select the customer’s reported satisfaction with the handling of the incident. 4 In the Process Flow Status area, in the Incident Closure box, choose Close. The status to now set to Closed. If the incident was broadcast, the broadcast is removed. 5 Click Save. 148 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 149.
    User’s Guide Creatingknown errors and solutions If the incident resolution is a known error or a good candidate for the solution database, you can propose an entry. Creating a known error from an incident If you have access to Problem Management, you can create a known error from an incident. " To create a known error from an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is Creating known errors and solutions ! 149 not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the navigation pane, choose Create Other Requests > Create Known error. The Known Error form appears. The relevant details from the incident are copied to the known error. Figure 4-38: Known error created from incident 4 Complete the Known Error form, as described in the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide. 5 Click Save.
  • 150.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Creating a solution database entry from an incident If you have access to Problem Management, you can publish the resolution from an incident into the solution database. " To create a solution entry from an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Support Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Resolution tab. Figure 4-39: Incident form open to the Resolution tab 4 Click Create and Edit Solution. The Solution form appears. The resolution details are already copied into the form. 150 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 151.
    User’s Guide Figure4-40: Solution created from incident Creating known errors and solutions ! 151 5 Edit the form as required. 6 Click Save. Tip: To avoid editing the Solution Database form, click Quick Create Solution. This copies the resolution details into the form, submits the solution entry as Inactive, sets the view access to Internal, and assigns the solution entry to the appropriate support group.
  • 152.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 152 "Chapter 4—Working with Incident Management as support staff
  • 153.
    Chapter 5 Workingwith Incident Management as a manager This section describes functions that are available to managers. An individual is defined as an incident manager by giving the user the functional role of incident manager or Support Group Manager for the support groups to which he or she belongs. For details, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. The following topics are provided: ! Understanding the Manager Console tab (page 154) ! Managing assignments (page 155) ! Reopening a closed incident (page 159) ! Understanding SLM calculations (page 160) ! Understanding notifications (page 160) ! Viewing the audit log (page 162) Working with Incident Management as a manager ! 153
  • 154.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Understanding the Manager Console tab With Incident Management version 7.0, managers now have a separate console. This console includes: ! Navigation pane—Provides display filters, links to functionality, and links to other applications. ! Search Criteria area—Used to search for assigned work. ! Broadcast area—Displays broadcasts and provides broadcast functionality. For details, see “Broadcasting messages” on page 55. ! Assigned Work area—Displays a summary of assigned incidents. ! Flashboards area—Provides a high-level graphical overview. Figure 5-1: Incident Management console—Manager Console tab Navigation pane 154 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
  • 155.
    User’s Guide Boththe navigation pane and Search Criteria area provide options to filter the assigned work on the console, as summarized in the following table. Table 5-1: Options to filter display of assigned work Option Explanation Company If you support multiple companies, leave this blank to display work for all companies, or select the appropriate company. Console View You can look at the personal view for work assigned to you, or you can change to view work assigned to your support groups. You can also view work that has been assigned to your support group, but is still unassigned to an individual. SLM Status To view incidents regardless of SLM status, leave this blank. Otherwise, select the appropriate SLM status. The SLM Status filter is available only if SLM is installed. Dates You can view open assigned incidents that were opened any time. You can also restrict the display to incidents opened within the selected time, such as within the last 24 hours. Role Incident managers can select either the Incident Manager or Managing assignments ! 155 Assignee role. Managing assignments An incident can be assigned to an individual or a group. Viewing unassigned incidents An incident can be assigned to your support group without being assigned to an individual. View the unassigned incidents, then assign them as described in “Assigning an incident” on page 156. " To view unassigned incidents 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is not selected. 2 From the navigation pane, perform one of the following steps: ! Choose Console View > Select My Groups > Show Unassigned. ! Choose Console View > All My Groups > Show Unassigned.
  • 156.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 3 If you are viewing unassigned incidents, from the Selected Groups list, you must confirm the selected groups, as follows. The My Group Selection dialog box appears. Figure 5-2: My Group Selection dialog box a In the View Group column, for each group, select Yes to indicate display incidents assigned to that group. b Click Update. The Assigned Work area shows unassigned incidents for the selected support groups. Assigning an incident You can assign the incident to anyone within your support group. To reassign the incident to another support group or to an assignee in another support group, see “Reassigning an incident” on page 124. " To assign an incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 Click the Assignment tab. 156 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
  • 157.
    User’s Guide Managingassignments ! 157 Figure 5-3: Completed Assignment tab 4 Select the appropriate assignee or support group. 5 Click Save. Monitoring an incident's status You can monitor an incident’s status through process flow, the Status field, and the assignment log. Process flow indicates the current stage and state of an incident. The Status field provides additional information. The assignment log indicates the history of assigned work that has been performed on the incident. Process flow Process flow provides a quick visual indicator of the current stage and state of an incident. When you open an incident, the Process Flow Status area appears toward the top of the form. Figure 5-4: Process Flow status area For additional information, see “Process flow and the life cycle of an incident request” on page 24.
  • 158.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Status field The Status field changes during the life cycle of the incident. Assignment log Table 5-2: Significance of the status field Status Description New The incident is unassigned. You can see this status only while completing a new incident. After you save the incident, the status changes to Assigned. Assigned The incident has been assigned to a support group or individual but has not yet been acknowledged. In Progress The assignment has been accepted and the assignee is working toward resolution. Pending Work on the incident has been temporarily suspended. Resolved A resolution or work-around to restore the service has been determined and is awaiting customer validation. Closed A resolution or work-around has restored the service and the customer has validated the resolution. Canceled Restoration of service is no longer required. The assignment log displays a list of all the groups and individuals that were assigned to work on the incident during its life cycle. One unique entry is generated for each individual and group assigned to work on the incident, but they are not arranged chronologically. To access the assignment log, click the Assignment tab, then click Update Assignment Log. Figure 5-5: Incident Assignment Log dialog box 158 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
  • 159.
    User’s Guide Reopeninga closed incident ! 159 There are three types of assignment logs: ! Initiated—This assignment log is generated by the application when the incident is submitted. It indicates who generated the incident and how long it took for the incident to be submitted to the application. ! Assigned—This assignment log is generated by the application when the incident is reassigned or resolved. ! Assisted—This assignment log is manually generated when a user follows the procedure described in “Recording time worked on an incident” on page 122. It tracks the amount of time spent by an individual who assisted with the incident, but who was not officially assigned to the incident. The fields for Group Transfers, Individual Transfers, and Total Transfers track the reassignments of the incident. Reopening a closed incident If you are a support group lead or support group manager, you can reopen closed incidents that your support group owns. If you have Incident Master permission, you can also reopen incidents owned by other support groups. If an incident is resolved, but not yet closed, anyone with access to the incident can reopen it, as described in “Reopening a resolved incident” on page 147. " To reopen a closed incident 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > Reopen Incident. This creates a new incident, copying information from the closed incident to the new incident, and defining a relationship between the two incidents. 4 Make any required changes to the new incident. 5 Click Save.
  • 160.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Understanding SLM calculations From the Incident form, you can view incident service targets defined in SLM, as described in “Viewing an incident” on page 133. Service targets can be defined in SLM for response time, and resolution time. Service targets for an incident can be determined by related CIs, product and service categorization, and many other criteria. The service target response time applies when an incident is recorded from an email, fax, voicemail, or web self-serve request. In this case the Responded Date is blank until someone indicates that the incident has been responded to (in the Responded field next to the SLM status indicators). When support staff record an incident, the Responded Date is set to the date that the incident is recorded. In general, the service target resolution time is calculated from when the incident is recorded until it is resolved. The following scenarios can affect the calculated resolution time: ! When an incident is in a pending state, it might not be included in SLM calculations, depending on the Status Reason. ! When a resolved incident is reopened, the SLM calculations account for time spent in the resolved state. Understanding notifications The purpose of the notification policy is to inform key IT support staff and customers about incidents that have caused a service disruption. Notifications from the application are automated and driven by events of the application. There might be some circumstances when you must manually send a notification. Automated notifications are sent to individuals or groups, such as when an incident is created, assigned, or resolved. If you are using SLM, escalating notifications can be sent, as described in “Notifications defined in SLM” on page 161. Individual and system-wide preferences indicate whether to send notifications by alert, email, or pager. The administrator can configure the notification method, as to whether business hours and holidays are respected, and whether to send individual or group notifications. For details on configuration, see the BMC Remedy IT Service Management 7.0 Configuration Guide. 160 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
  • 161.
    User’s Guide Thefollowing scenarios are examples of notifications sent from Incident Management: ! Customers are notified by email when the incident is resolved. The email Understanding notifications ! 161 includes the resolution. ! The incident owner is notified when an incident is resolved, if the assignee group is different from the owner group. ! The Problem assignment group or assignee is notified when a solution entry is created from an incident. Assignees of incidents related to problem investigations, known errors, and change requests can receive notification from Problem Management or Change Management. See the BMC Remedy Service Desk: Problem Management 7.0 User’s Guide and BMC Remedy Change Management 7.0 User’s Guide for details. Notifications defined in SLM Notifications can also be sent out based on milestone actions that are defined as part of service targets in the SLM application. Service target escalations occur when the incident’s responded date is in danger of breaching the service terms. For example, this happens when: ! The target response time has elapsed and the incident is still assigned. ! The target resolution time has elapsed and the incident is still open (not resolved, closed, or canceled). You can view the Responded Date on the Date/System tab. For details on service target calculations, see “Understanding SLM calculations” on page 160. You can configure SLM to send notifications to incident assignees, assignee group managers, incident owners, or owner group managers by using templates included with the Incident Management integration with SLM. For details on configuring service targets and notifications in SLM, see the BMC Service Level Management 7.0 User’s Guide.
  • 162.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Viewing the audit log You can view field changes and notifications for the incident. The application generates an audit entry when notifications are sent, and also when the record is modified; it creates an audit entry for each field and relationship that is modified. The Login ID of the individual making the change appears next to the audit entry. " To view the audit log 1 On the Incident Management console, click the Manager Console tab if it is not selected. 2 Open an incident. 3 In the navigation pane, choose Functions > View Audit Log. The Incident Audit Log dialog box appears. Changes to fields appear on the Form Audits tab. Figure 5-6: Incident Audit Log dialog box 4 To filter the list, select the appropriate audit type. The Audit Type list provides selections for fields, such as Status, and groups of related fields, such as Key Dates. The filter displays audit records for changes to the selected field or fields. 5 To see notifications, click the Notification Audits tab. All notifications that are sent from an incident are audited. The notifications appear on the Notification Audits tab. 162 "Chapter 5—Working with Incident Management as a manager
  • 163.
    Chapter 6 Managingconfiguration items A configuration item (CI) is any component of an infrastructure, for example, hardware or software components, a service, an inventory location, a network (LAN or WAN), and so on. You can use the information in CIs to diagnose user problems or to determine if a change to a CI or the IT infrastructure must be made. For example, if a user calls in with a printing problem, a staff member can check to see if the printer (CI) is down or in repair. To record information against CIs, such as CI unavailability or relating an incident to a CI, the CI must be recorded in the CMDB. If you do not have BMC Remedy Asset Management, then Incident Management provides limited ability to manage CIs and inventory. Note: This functionality is available whether or not BMC Remedy Asset Management is installed. If you have BMC Remedy Asset Management, you have access to additional functionality, as described in BMC Remedy Asset Management 7.0 User’s Guide. Managing configuration items ! 163 The following topics are provided: ! Creating a CI (page 164) ! Managing inventory (page 170)
  • 164.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Creating a CI To create a CI, you must have Asset Admin permission. If you have Asset User permission and you need to modify a CI, your administrator must open the appropriate CI, and then relate your support group to the CI. The fields on the CI form vary with the CI type. This section provides examples of creating three types of CIs: ! “Creating a computer system CI” on page 164 ! “Creating a bulk inventory CI” on page 167 ! “Creating an inventory location CI” on page 169 Creating a computer system CI The following procedure is an example of creating a computer system CI. For creating other types of CIs, the general procedure is similar, with the exception of specific fields on the CI form. " To create a computer system CI 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Manage CIs. The Select a CI Type dialog box appears. Figure 6-1: Select a CI Type dialog box 2 From the CI Type list, select System > Computer System. 3 Click Create. The Computer System form appears. 164 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
  • 165.
    User’s Guide Creatinga CI ! 165 Figure 6-2: Completed Computer System form 4 In the CI Name field, type a name for the CI. When creating a CI name, you should follow a consistent naming convention. According to ITIL guidelines, identifiers should be short but meaningful, and for hardware, not based on supplier device names. For example, the name could include an indicator of the CI’s function (such as “Workstation” or “Monitor”) followed by a numeric code, such as MONITOR100. 5 In the CI ID field, type a unique alphanumeric value for the CI. 6 Specify whether the CI is supported by selecting Yes or No from the Supported list. 7 Select the company to which this CI belongs. 8 From the Primary Capability and Capability lists, select the roles this CI performs in your company’s topology. 9 Select a status from the Status list.
  • 166.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 The default value is Ordered. You can select one of the following options. Status Description Received The CI was received in shipping. Being Assembled The CI is being assembled. Deployed The CI was installed. In Repair The CI is down for maintenance. Down The CI is down, but not yet in maintenance. End of Life The CI is no longer being deployed. Transferred The CI was transferred to another location. Delete The CI is marked for deletion. You must be a member of the APP-Management or APP-Administrator group to mark a CI for deletion. In Inventory The CI is in inventory but not yet deployed. When you select this status, you are prompted to select the inventory location. On Loan The CI is on loan to another location. Disposed The CI is no longer available and was disposed of. Reserved The CI was reserved and taken out of inventory. Return to Vendor The CI must be returned to the vendor as damaged or unwanted. 10 Select what impact or urgency this CI will have if it goes down. 11 In the Users Affected field, specify the number of people who use this CI or will be affected if it goes down. 12 Complete the other fields in this area. Field name Description Tag Number The CI tag number. This is the number 166 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items usually placed on the product by a member of your IT department to track the CI. Serial Number The CI serial number. Part Number The CI part number.
  • 167.
    User’s Guide Fieldname Description System Role The role this CI plays in your company. Status Reason The reason this CI has the status it does. 13 Click the General tab. 14 Categorize your CI using the lists and fields in the Product Categorization Creating a CI ! 167 area. 15 Specify the location of the CI using the lists and fields in the Location area. 16 Enter the dates of the CI in the Lifecycle area. 17 Click the Specifications tab. 18 Add additional information about the CI. 19 Click Save. Creating a bulk inventory CI Use the following procedure to create bulk inventory CIs. " To create a bulk inventory CI 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Manage CIs. The Manage CI Information dialog box appears. 2 From the CI Type list, select Inventory > Bulk Inventory, and click Create. The Bulk Inventory form appears.
  • 168.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Figure 6-3: Completed Bulk Inventory form 3 Complete the following required fields. Field name Description CI Name Enter the name of the bulk inventory 4 Click Save. 168 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items item, for example, Microsoft Windows XP. Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 Categorize the item. Received Quantity Enter the number of items received.
  • 169.
    User’s Guide Creatinga CI ! 169 Creating an inventory location CI The following procedure uses the example of creating a location CI. Location CIs can be used when managing inventory. Use them to indicate where bulk inventory and other CIs are located. " To create a location CI 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Manage CIs. The Manage CI Information dialog box appears. 2 From the Type list, select System > Inventory Location, and click Create. The Inventory Location form appears. Figure 6-4: Completed Inventory Location form 3 In the CI Name field, enter the location name. 4 Complete the other, optional fields. 5 Click Save.
  • 170.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Managing inventory You can use the Manage Inventory function to track bulk inventory items and other CIs that are available for deployment. Before you can track inventory, you must: ! Create inventory location CIs. ! Create bulk inventory CIs, or other CIs to be tracked as inventory. ! For bulk inventory, specify the received quantity and the inventory locations. ! For non-bulk inventory CIs, set the inventory status to In Inventory, and select a location. Note: For instructions on creating CIs, see “Creating a CI” on page 164. After items are in inventory, you can use the Manage Inventory function to view, relocate, and reserve and use CIs and bulk inventory items. Viewing inventory locations You can view the location of inventory from the Manage Inventory dialog box. " To view inventory locations 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Manage Inventory. The Manage Inventory dialog box appears. 170 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
  • 171.
    User’s Guide Figure6-5: Search results in the Manage Inventory dialog box Managing inventory ! 171 2 Enter your search criteria, and click Search. Results matching your search criteria appear in the table. 3 Select a CI or bulk inventory item from the table, and click View Location. The Inventory Location form appears. Figure 6-6: Inventory Location form
  • 172.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 4 View the CIs in the inventory. 5 Click Close. Relocating CIs You can relocate CIs or bulk inventory items from one location to another. " To relocate assets 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Manage Inventory. The Manage Inventory dialog box appears. 2 Search for inventory in the current location. 3 Select the CI or bulk inventory item you want to relocate, and click Relocate CIs. The Search Inventory Locations dialog box appears. Figure 6-7: Search Inventory Locations dialog box displaying results 4 For the location where you want to relocate the CI, specify search criteria, and click Search. Results matching your search criteria appear in the table. 5 Select the location where you want to relocate your CI. 172 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
  • 173.
    User’s Guide 6In the Quantity field, enter the number of CIs you want to relocate. 7 Click Relocate. Managing inventory ! 173 Reserving and using inventory You can reserve and use the CIs and bulk inventory items that are in inventory. " To reserve and use inventory 1 From the navigation pane in the Incident Management console, choose General Functions > Manage Inventory. The Manage Inventory dialog box appears. 2 Select the CI or bulk inventory item you want to reserve and use. 3 Click in the Transaction Qty column and enter the number of assets or bulk inventory items you want to use. Figure 6-8: Manage Inventory dialog box with transaction quantity 4 Click Reserve/Use Inventory. The number of CIs or bulk inventory items in the Qty in Stock column is reduced by the number reserved and used. Enter the number of assets you want to use, and click Reserve/Use Inventory.
  • 174.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 174 "Chapter 6—Managing configuration items
  • 175.
    Glossary ! 175 Glossary This glossary contains terms for all of the ITSM applications. For a list of AR System terms, see the glossary in BMC Remedy Action Request System 7.0 Concepts guide. For a list of CMDB terms, see the glossary in BMC Atrium CMDB 2.0 Concepts and Best Practices Guide. accelerated depreciation Any method of depreciation that allows greater deductions in the earlier years of a CI’s life cycle. See also depreciation and configuration item (CI). access permission See permission group. action A mechanism, such as an alert or a Set Fields action, for making sure that SLM commitments are met. You can define one or more actions that will be associated with a milestone. administrator See application administrator. Administration console See Application Administration console. agreement A documented understanding between two parties. An agreement can be one of three types: service level agreement, operational level agreement, or underpinning contract. See also service level agreement (SLA), operational level agreement (OLA), and underpinning contract (UC). agreement owners A feature that allows you to select which individuals or groups of people to notify at certain times, for example, when an SLA is at risk or when an SLA is going to expire. application administrator An individual responsible for the management of the ITSM applications, including setting up forms, setting access rights for users, and creating configurations.
  • 176.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 Application Administration console The main interface for configuring ITSM applications. The console works like a control panel from which administrators can perform common configuration activities and activities specific to different ITSM applications and subsystems. approval A process that generates electronic signature lines for items that require approval, and tracks who has approved or rejected a given request. asset manager The manager responsible for both strategy and day-to-day CI management functions, for example, updating CIs and configurations, running reports, or negotiating contracts. assignee The person assigned the responsibility of working on any of the following activities: change request, incident ticket, problem investigation, known error, solution database entry, and so on. assignment Automatically or manually assigning a group or individual the responsibility of resolving an issue or request. ITSM applications use the Assignment form for group automatic assignment and the Assignment Engine for individual automatic assignment. audit schedule A schedule used to perform periodic audits that check for differences between the information in the CI database and the CIs that are deployed in the company. 176 "Glossary availability service target A service target that measures the time that an asset or service is available or unavailable. This service target applies specifically to data that is tracked in an application based on AR System, such as Asset Management. BMC Atrium Configuration Management Database (BMC Atrium CMDB) An infrastructure built on AR System and used to build data models and define datasets. book value The value of a CI equal to the purchase cost minus the accumulated depreciation. broadcast message An application feature that enables users to create messages that can be viewed by the entire organization or by users in specific groups. BSM See business service management (BSM). bulk inventory Assets that you order in quantity, such as power cables. bulk items Items that are not tracked by an individual record for each unit. Bulk items in inventory are tracked by quantities of an item type. For example, items such as cables do not require individual records but rather, one record for a bulk quantity of the specific cable type. Bulk Performance Manager Node A feature that allows the administrator to add multiple nodes to a service target at one time. This feature is specific to collection nodes for BMC Performance Manager. See also collection node.
  • 177.
    User’s Guide Glossary! 177 business service management (BSM) A flexible, comprehensive management approach that links IT resources and business objectives. BSM makes sure that everything IT does is prioritized according to business impact, and enables IT organizations to proactively address business requirements. CAB See change advisory board (CAB) CCM See Change and Configuration Management. change advisory board (CAB) A group that advises change management on the implementation of significant changes to the IT infrastructure. This group is often made up of representatives from various IT areas and business units. Change and Configuration Management An application feature that proactively manages both IT and business-driven changes, and protects the IT environment. It does this by using planning and decision-making data contained in a dedicated BMC Atrium CMDB. change authority The name of a group with the authority to approve changes. This group can also be called the Change Advisory Board. See also change advisory board (CAB). change management As a concept, the process of planning, scheduling, implementing, and tracking changes to the IT infrastructure, or any other aspect of service, in a controlled manner. By using change management, you can implement approved changes with minimal disruption to the business environment. change manager A person responsible for filtering, accepting, and classifying all change requests. The change manager is also responsible for planning and coordinating the implementation of the changes. Sometimes known as a change supervisor. change request The controlled process for the addition, modification, or removal of approved, supported, or baselined hardware, networks, software, applications, environments, or systems. A change request can involve multiple change activities. charge-back The process of charging departments or cost centers for the IT infrastructure required to support their business processes. charge-back invoice A detailed list of charges to cost centers, including any charge-back percentage. charge-back percentage A percentage used to calculate charge-back costs. charge-back report A report used by a cost manager to track information and find entries that might need to be adjusted. charge-back summary The total charges made to cost centers, including charge-back percentage. For split cost centers, it also provides information about how charges are allocated for source cost centers and target cost centers. CI See configuration item (CI).
  • 178.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 CI browser A component of ITSM. The CI browser lets you search for and view CIs and their relationships. CI unavailability The downtime of a CI. CI unavailability record The time when a CI is either partially or completely unavailable to perform its required function. CI unavailability records can be broadcast or related to other records. class Metadata in the BMC Atrium CMDB that defines a type of object, usually a configuration item (CI) or relationship. client tier The architecture level where AR System clients operate within the multitier system. CMDB See BMC Atrium Configuration Management Database (BMC Atrium CMDB). Reconciliation Engine A component of the BMC Atrium CMDB. The Reconciliation Engine merges data from different discovery services based on identification and precedence rules. collection node The data source for the information that is forwarded to the collection points. Some examples of data sources are BMC Performance Manager Classic, BMC Performance Manager Express, BMC Application Response Time, and SNMP data sources. 178 "Glossary collection point The component in the SLM application that is responsible for collecting the data. You can add multiple collection points with different port numbers. collector The component in the SLM application that manages the collection points and retrieves data. Company field A field in ITSM that controls multi-tenancy. It shows only data for the companies for which you have permission. See also multi-tenancy. compliance at risk target A target (such as 99.5 percent) that identifies when the agreement's compliance reaches a point that is nearing a breach state and should be identified as a potential risk. See also compliance-only service target and compliance service target. compliance-only service target A service target that enables you to access data already processed by another product for use in compliance calculations. Using the compliance-only service target, SLM calculates compliance results at the agreement level only, by accessing service target results that were already processed by another application. See also compliance at risk target and compliance service target. compliance service target A target (such as 99 percent) that tracks the performance of the agreement to see the percentage of time the agreement was met over specific time periods. See also compliance at risk target and compliance-only service target.
  • 179.
    User’s Guide Glossary! 179 configuration Sets of CIs that are required by different groups of people in the company. configuration catalog A feature of Asset Management that stores your standard configurations (such as a standard desktop, laptop, server, and so on) for management purposes. configuration item (CI) An infrastructure component or an item associated with the infrastructure that is (or will be) under the control of configuration management, for example, a Request for Change. A CI can be complex or simple, large or small. CIs can include entire systems or be a single module or minor component. CIs can also include records of people (users and customers) and locations. configuration management The process of maintaining detailed IT inventory records. It involves identifying and defining the CIs in a system, recording and reporting the status of all CIs and requests for change, and verifying the completeness and correctness of all CIs. See also configuration item (CI). Configuration Management Database See BMC Atrium Configuration Management Database (BMC Atrium CMDB). contract A documented relationship between two parties that identifies details about each party, accounting and budget codes, purchase cost, and expiration dates, and ties one or more SLAs, OLAs, or underpinning contracts to the interested parties. The contract also makes it possible to segment and restrict access to the compliance and service target results so that results can be viewed by contract. cost center An entity tracking cost information within an organization. See also split cost center. cost management All of the policies, procedures, and deliverables required to fulfil an organization’s costing and charging requirements. currency code The three-letter code that represents a currency type, such as USD for United States Dollars. dashboard Web-based, graphical user interface using flashboards where compliance and service target results can be viewed by service level managers, service delivery managers, other IT professionals, and customers or line of business owners. See also service level agreement (SLA), service target, and flashboard. data consumer An application that works with data in ITSM. It might view the data or modify it. See also data provider.
  • 180.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 data provider An application that loads data into ITSM. This is often a discovery application. See also data consumer. dataset A logical group of data in ITSM. A dataset can represent data from a particular source, a snapshot from a particular date, and so on. The dataset used by BMC products for reconciled production data is named BMC Asset. decision tree A step-by-step guide set up by an administrator. It guides the user through a questionnaire and, based on the user’s answers, completes part of the form for a new incident. declining balance depreciation A method of calculating depreciation in which CIs depreciate at a constant rate per year, accelerated by a factor of 150 percent. In this method of accelerated depreciation, 150 percent of the straight-line depreciation amount is taken the first year, and then that same percentage is applied to the undepreciated amount in subsequent years. See also double-declining balance depreciation. definitive software library (DSL) A central repository of approved product dictionary entries (PDEs). See also product dictionary entry (PDE). dependent change request A change request that must be completed in sequence, as defined by the change manager. depreciation The loss of an asset’s value resulting from the passage of time. 180 "Glossary double-declining balance depreciation A method of calculating depreciation in which CIs depreciate at a constant rate per year, accelerated by a factor of 200 percent. In this method of accelerated depreciation, double the straight-line depreciation amount is taken the first year, and then that same percentage is applied to the undepreciated amount in subsequent years. See also declining balance depreciation. down CI A CI out of service for repairs or not working. DSL See definitive software library (DSL). escalation A workflow component that searches at specified times or at regular intervals for requests matching a specified condition, and performs specified operations on all matching requests. Escalations are generally used to find records that have exceeded desired business rules or processes, and take appropriate action. They run on the AR System server. federated data Data linked from a CI in ITSM but stored externally. Federated data might represent more attributes of the CI or related information, such as change requests on the CI. flashboard A real-time visual monitoring tool that shows you the state of your service operations, warns you about potential problems, and collects and shows trend data.
  • 181.
    User’s Guide Glossary! 181 form A collection of fields that represents a record of information in the AR System. AR System administrators can define and change the fields and workflow associated with a form. An AR System application can include many forms. functional role A defined role used for notifications and to extend access granted by permission groups. global A setting that applies changes or defines certain parameters for all companies in a multi-tenancy environment. See also multi-tenancy. goal Measurement method that allows you to track the time taken to resolve an issue or track how often an asset or service was available. Goals are used to determine whether service targets are met. guest user Users who have not been configured with login information in the People form. Guest users cannot create change requests. impacted area Companies, locations, or organizations affected by changes or updates to CIs. incident Any event that is not part of the standard operation of a service and that causes an interruption to or reduction in the quality of that service. See also incident management and problem investigation. incident management As a concept, a reactive process typically initiated in response to a customer’s call. The primary goal of the incident management process is to restore normal service operation as quickly as possible and with minimum disruption to the business. incident manager A person who monitors incident tickets and activities to help plan resources and to identify incident trends. The incident manager also handles assignments. incident matching A search process in Incident Management that can be used to search for other incidents, problem investigations, known errors, and solution database entries that share some of the same characteristics as the current incident, such as product categorization. incident owner The user who records the incident. This user might differ from the current incident assignee. See also assignee. Information Technology Infrastructure Library (ITIL) A set of guidelines for the management and provision of operational IT services. instance A record in ITSM. An instance is an object of a particular class. Both CIs and relationships are considered instances. inventory The quantity of CIs available. ISO currency code See currency code. ITIL See Information Technology Infrastructure Library (ITIL).
  • 182.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 key performance indicator (KPI) A data point used to measure whether performance-monitoring service targets meet their goals. See also service level agreement (SLA). known error A problem that has been successfully diagnosed and for which a temporary work-around or permanent solution to the known error has been identified. See also problem and work-around. KPI See key performance indicator (KPI). life cycle asset management Managing the life of a CI through its purchase, deployment, and disposal. maintenance schedule A schedule used to perform maintenance on CIs. measurement The metric by which supervisors measure the ability of the support staff to meet their agreements. milestone A point in time that triggers a set of actions as you progress toward an agreement compliance target or service target goal. The triggered actions are to make sure your goals are being met. multi-tenancy A feature in ITSM that uses the Company field to limit access by individuals. The Company field can be used to represent a company, department, or other group. The Company field also can be used to control access in a hosted environment. By default, ITSM applications operate in multi-tenancy mode. See also single-tenancy. 182 "Glossary navigation pane An area on the left side of consoles that provides links to functionality and links to other programs. New Request Wizard A simple form for requesters to submit service requests. Requesters use the New Request Wizard interface to submit service requests to IT, which is the only way to submit a service request from the Requester console. non-bulk CIs Stand-alone configuration items, for example, a single server or laptop. notification A message sent to a user by workflow. Notification can be in the form of an alert, email message, or other method using integrations. OLA See operational level agreement (OLA). operational catalog A feature in which operational categories for service requests are defined. operational categorization A three-tier hierarchical representation of operations as defined in the Operational Catalog configuration form. This categorization is included in records to specify the range of operations to which a record applies. operational level agreement (OLA) An internal agreement used to define and track the level of service provided for an IT organization. An example is an agreement between the network management team and the service desk.
  • 183.
    User’s Guide Glossary! 183 operator One of a number of functions that enable you to define advanced searches or build qualifications. Overview console A central console for ITSM applications. The console works like a control panel from which users can access all assigned work and perform their primary activities. parent/child contract A parent, or main, contract that has other children, or subcontracts, associated with it. PDE See product dictionary entry (PDE). peer change request A dependent change request that can be completed at the same time as another change request. peer-to-peer Devices that are on the same level in an organization’s network (for example, two workstations). See also notification. performance-level service target A service target that compares a service level to the goals defined in the service target to determine whether the goal is met. Allows you to monitor whether a critical application that you are using has responded within the time period specified in the goals. See also goal. performance-monitoring service target A service target that compares a goal to a defined threshold to determine if the goal is met. For example, it allows you to monitor whether a critical application that you are using responds within 4 seconds or if the application meets other criteria such as being in a state of “OK.” permission group A feature of the ITSM applications that controls what areas of the application a users can access. Each permission group can access only certain areas of the application. A user can belong to more than one permission group. problem The root cause of an incident or potential incident. After a resolution or work-around is identified, the problem becomes a solution database entry or known error. See also incident, known error, solution database, and work-around. problem investigation A process that helps an IT organization diagnose the root cause of incidents and potential incidents. It initiates actions that help to improve or correct the situation, preventing the incident from recurring. problem management As a concept, a process that identifies the cause of problems and initiates actions that help to improve or correct the situation, preventing an incident from recurring or occurring in the first place. The cause identified by a problem investigation can be documented in a known error or solution database record. See also incident, known error, solution database, and problem. problem manager A person who reviews problem investigations and known errors to maintain the quality and integrity of the problem management process. This person coordinates the assignment of problem investigations and known errors to support staff, and also reviews problem investigation requests and performs business impact analysis.
  • 184.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 process flow Shows the progress of a request as it moves through the stages of its life cycle. It does this within a form, such as an incident request. A diagram shows the stages of the process, as indicated by best practices, rooted in ITIL processes. It indicates the current stage and state of the request. The process flow diagram also serves as a wizard, guiding the user through the life cycle. product categorization A five-tier hierarchical representation of products as defined in the Product Catalog configuration form. This categorization is included in records to specify the range of products to which the record applies. product dictionary entry (PDE) An entry in the Definitive Software Library that represents the master name of a software application. See also definitive software library (DSL). push field An advanced action that allows you to push information from the “Applies To” form for which you are creating an SLA to another form on the same server. See also service level agreement (SLA). reconciliation A feature in Asset Management that checks for duplicate CI records and enables the user to delete one and keep the other. registered user A user who has an entry in the People form with an AR System login ID. relationship A type of BMC Atrium CMDB class that defines the relationship between two CIs. 184 "Glossary reminder A message similar to an AR System notification, except that you can define the content of a reminder and specify when to send it. request-based service target A service target that measures how long a process takes, such as the time to respond to or resolve a service desk request, or the time to respond to or resolve a change request. requester A person in the organization who needs assistance from the IT support staff. A requester is usually an employee in the organization who needs to have a change implemented or an incident resolved. Requester console The front end for the Change Management and Incident Management applications. It provides an easy, user-friendly interface that allows users to quickly submit requests for change or incidents to the two back-end applications, and to view their submitted requests. residual value The value you can purchase an item for after its lease expires. return on investment (ROI) A method of calculating when the capital cost of implementing a project, product, or service will be recovered through the savings that result from completing the activity. The ROI can be expressed in terms of internal savings, increased revenue from external sources, or some combination of these types of savings. See also service level agreement (SLA) and service level management (SLM).
  • 185.
    User’s Guide Glossary! 185 review period A period of time over which the compliance of an agreement is monitored on a regular basis. The following review periods are provided in SLM: Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and Quarterly. For example, if a Monthly review period is added to a service level agreement, then the SLA's compliance target needs to be met on a monthly basis. If a Daily review period is also added, then the SLA's compliance target needs to be met on both a daily basis and a monthly basis. See also service level agreement (SLA) and service level management (SLM). ROI See return on investment (ROI). role A set of responsibilities, activities, and authorizations, usually within the context of a single application or a business system. Note: Access to Remedy ITSM applications is based on user roles. Depending on your role in the organization—requester, support, management—you work with a different application (or view) on your desktop. root cause The underlying cause of an IT-related problem experienced by a customer. row level locking See multi-tenancy. salvage value The estimated value that a CI will realize at the end of its useful life. See also useful life. script Detailed instructions that have been set up by an administrator to prompt users with questions that can assist in resolving or assigning an incident. service catalog A list of IT services, default levels, and options. service level agreement (SLA) An agreement between a service provider and its customers or lines of business that formally documents the needs of the customer and makes sure the correct level of service is received from the service provider. service level management (SLM) As a concept, the continuous and proactive process of defining, agreeing, monitoring, reporting, and reviewing the performance of IT services to make sure that adequate levels of service are delivered in alignment with business needs and at acceptable cost. service manager A manager who uses Asset Management to create service objects used for interpreting business problems, for example, cost of unavailability of services to a business area. service request A request for service to the IT organization. Service requests can be requests for change or requests to resolve incidents that impact the user. Service Request console See Requester console.
  • 186.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 service target The individual level of service to achieve. A service target includes terms and conditions, goals, costs, and milestones. Examples of service target goals include incident resolution time of 30 minutes, application response time of 4 seconds, and an application being in a state of “OK.” See also availability service target, performance-monitoring service target, request-based service target, and compliance service target. set field An advanced action that allows you to pull information from other forms to set in the form for which you are creating the agreement. single-tenancy A feature that allows selection of a default company for company fields in ITSM. Single-tenancy mode is required to give unknown users access to the ITSM Requester console. See also multi-tenancy. SLI See software library item (SLI). SLM See service level management (SLM). software library item (SLI) The physical storage locations of the master copy of a software application and its versions. software license compliance Keeping track of what software your company has and that it has the legal right to use it. solution database A repository that stores reusable solutions to customer product problems in an easy-to-retrieve format. 186 "Glossary solution entry A reusable solution to a customer product problem. This is stored in the solution database. split cost center A cost center that enables a department to split its costs with other departments. For example, a project management group might split its costs with an engineering department and a sales department. The project management department would be a split cost center, and the engineering department and sales department would be target cost centers. straight-line depreciation A method of calculating depreciation in which CIs depreciate at a constant value per year. The annual depreciation is calculated by subtracting the salvage value of the CI from the purchase price and then dividing this number by the estimated useful life of the CI. submitter A person who reports a problem, makes a request, or enters information into a database. See also change request. submitter group One of several special access control groups that the AR System provides. Users automatically belong to this implicit group for requests they have submitted. See also assignee. sum-of-the-year’s digits depreciation A method of calculating depreciation in which CIs lose more of their value early in their lifetime. This method of calculating depreciation of a CI assumes higher depreciation charges and greater tax benefits in the early years of a CI's life.
  • 187.
    User’s Guide Glossary! 187 task A unit of work that needs to be completed as a step in implementing an incident or problem investigation. In the Change Management application, you can also group a number of activities for requests with a number of actions that need to be completed before the request can be resolved. Your administrator creates task templates and task group templates that you can reuse for the same types of requests. Tasks can be manual or automatic. task management system (TMS) A sub-system that is used to create task templates and task group templates. Besides the ability to set up predecessor-successor relationships, TMS supports branching and multiple task paths as well as the data exchange between activities. TCO See total cost of ownership (TCO). template 1. A set of predefined criteria or settings that can be used by many agreements or service targets. See also service level agreement (SLA). 2. A form set up by an administrator that a user can select to complete an incident ticket or a change request with information consistent with the user’s support group and the type of incident or change request. terms and conditions The conditions that specify whether a service target should take effect. For example, the terms and conditions could specify that the service target applies only to incidents in which the priority is urgent and the service is email. Or the service target applies only to a specific set of KPIs. See also service target. time-based service target A service target that measures the time taken, for example, to resolve an incident from the time the incident was reported to the time it was resolved. Any time that falls within the “Exclude when” qualification is ignored and not measured. TMS See task management system (TMS). topology The pattern of links connecting pairs of nodes of a network. total cost of ownership (TCO) A method of calculating all expenses associated with a CI over its lifetime. The calculation considers depreciation, maintenance, staff costs, accommodation, and planned renewal. UC See underpinning contract (UC). underpinning contract (UC) A contract that is used to track performance against prearranged goals that the IT organization has with an external service provider or supplier. useful life The number of years that a depreciable CI is expected to be in use. wildcard A character that users can type to represent other characters in a search. For example, in search statements in character fields, users can specify wildcards to match single characters, strings, or characters within a range or set. work info A record describing work performed.
  • 188.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 work-around A temporary resolution to an incident, problem, or known error. workflow The automated set of business processes used to run a company. 188 "Glossary
  • 189.
    Index ! 189 Index A accelerators for process flows, best practice 24 ad hoc requests 82 adding customer profiles 117 work information 51 advanced qualifications, using to generate reports 69 Advanced Search, using to find records 40 answers. See solutions application preferences, setting 106–108 Asset Management, about 11 Assigned Work area about 32 defined 104 filtering 105, 121 refreshing 35 assigning incidents 156 tasks 129 assignment log about 158 deleting 123 assignments See also incidents about 120–132 accepting 122 incidents, reassigning 124 incidents, viewing 121 logged 158 assignments (continued) managing 155–159 receiving notification of 121 recording time worked 122 vendors 126 working with 121–123 associations. See relationships Atrium CMDB. See CMDB audience 13 audit log, viewing 162 auto-filling fields 38 B Best Practice icon 10 best practices CI naming conventions 165 retrying events in order 98 using CIs to diagnose user problems 163 using process flow accelerators 24 BMC Atrium CMDB. See CMDB BMC Remedy User, opening Incident Management console with 28 Broadcast area, defined 104 broadcasts creating 55 limiting 59 location in Overview console 36 viewing 58, 102
  • 190.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 browsers entering main console URL 77 using to open Incident Management console 30 bulk inventory CI 167 Bulk Inventory form 168 bulletin board messages. See broadcasts Bulletin Board. See broadcasts C calculations 160 canceling service requests 87 categorization, defined 20 Change Management about 11 creating changes from incidents 146 requester role 74 Change Request Information form 146 CIs bulk inventory example 167 computer system example 164 creating 164–169 inventory location example 169 naming conventions, best practice 165 problem diagnosis and, best practice 163 recording unavailability 116 relocating 172 status 165 closing incidents 147 CMDB, about 10 colors of service targets, explained 134 Command Event Master permission 97 computer system CI 164 Computer System form 165 Configuration Item Unavailability form 117 consoles changing view of 36 Incident Management Manager Console tab 154–155 Support Console tab 104–105 Overview 31 Report 66 Requester 76 copying relationships 46 Costs form 140 190 "Index costs, recording 139–141 Create Incident form 110 creating broadcasts 55 CIs 164–169 customer profiles 117 incident records 108–112 infrastructure change from incidents 146 known errors from incidents 149 problem investigations from incidents 144 records 34 reminders 53–55 service requests 80 solution entries from incidents 150 tasks 127–129 customer profiles adding 117 modifying 119 D decision trees defined 20 using 114 defining relationships 43 diagnosing incidents 132 documents available for ITSM 13–16 duplicating incidents 114 E email, sending messages about CIs with 63–65 enhanced problem management, defined 20 errors, known, creating 149 event logs, viewing 97 F features, new 18–21 Flashboards area, defined 154 forms Bulk Inventory 168 Change Request Information 146 Computer System 165 Configuration Item Unavailability 117 Costs 140 Incident Creation 110 Inventory Location 169, 171
  • 191.
    User’s Guide Index! 191 forms (continued) Known Error 149 Modify Incident 138, 141 New/Modify Broadcasts 56 People 118 Problem Investigation 145 Request Work Info 95 Service Request 92, 98 Solution Database 151 Task 128 Work Info 85, 129 G generating reports about 65 with advanced qualifications 69 with qualifications 67 with saved qualifications 70 without qualifications 65 Guest User permission 22 H Help Desk, new features 20 I icons Best Practice 10 New 10 impacted areas, indicating 47 Incident Management console Manager Console tab 154 opening from a browser 30 opening with BMC Remedy User client 28 Support Console tab 104 Incident Management, about 11 incidents See also assignments accepting assignments 122 assigning 156 to vendors 126 assignment log 158 closing 147 costs, recording 139–141 incidents (continued) creating infrastructure from 146 known errors from 149 problem investigations from 144 solution entries from 150 diagnosing 132 five stages of request 26 investigating 132 life cycle of 24–26 matching 20, 135 monitoring status 157 moving from investigation to resolution 137 ownership, about 125 process flow status 133 reassigning 124 recording 108–120 recording time worked 122 records 108–112 relating as duplicates 114 reopening 147, 159 resolving 135, 141–147 resolving with Solution database 101 status 158 templates 21 unassigned, viewing 155 using decision trees 114 using templates 112 viewing 133–135 assignments 121 changes through audit logs 162 infrastructure changes 146 inventory bulk inventory CI 167 location CIs 169 managing 170–173 reserving 173 using 173 viewing locations 170 Inventory Location form 169, 171 investigations 132 IT Service Management, about product family 10–13
  • 192.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 K Known Error form 149 known errors, creating 149 L life cycle of an incident 24–26 limiting number of broadcast messages 59 location of CIs 169 logs assignment 158 audit 162 event 97 M main consoles URL for browser 77 Manager console, about 154–155 manager role 23 managing inventory 170–173 Modify Incident form 138, 141 modifying customer profiles 119 incidents 137 profile 37 records 42 relationships 48 service requests 85 multi-tenancy unknown users 75 multi-tenancy, defined 20 N navigation pane about 36–38 defined 20, 104 new features 18–21 New icon 10 New Request Wizard, defined 80 New/Modify Broadcasts form 56 Notes field. See Work Info form Notes Log field. See Work Info form 192 "Index notifications about 160 assignments 121 in SLM 161 viewing through audit logs 162 O opening Incident Management console from a browser 30 Incident Management console from a desktop 28 other applications 36 Requester console 77 service request records 92 service requests 87, 93 Overview console 31 about 31–38 functions 36 opening from a browser 32 opening from a desktop 32 ownership for incidents 125 P paging on-call groups 60–62 one person 60–62 People form 118 permissions Command Event Master 97 Request Console Master 22 Requester console 74 User, with Requester console 22 printing records 41 service requests 86 prioritization, defined 21 Problem Investigation form 145 problem investigations, creating 144 Problem Management, about 12 process flow about 24–26 accelerators, best practice 24 monitoring incident status with 157 status area 133
  • 193.
    User’s Guide Index! 193 Process Flow Status wizard 24, 25 recording new incidents with 109 profile, viewing and modifying 37 Q qualifications, generating reports with 67 quick actions about 49 using 38 R recording CI unavailability 116 incident with Process Flow Status wizard 109 new incidents 108–120 work performed on tasks 130 records advanced searching for 40 creating 34 modifying 42 printing 41 relating and unrelating 43 searching for 35, 38 searching for all 41 searching for personal 39 refreshing data 35 Registered User permission 22 registered users 74 relationships copying 46 defining 43 impacted areas 47 modifying 48 quick actions 49 relating and unrelating records 43 removing 51 relocating CIs 172 Remedy User. See BMC Remedy User reminders, creating 53–55 removing relationships 51 reopening closed incidents 147, 159 resolved incidents 147 Report console 66 reports about 65 generating 65 with advanced qualifications 69 with qualifications 67 with saved qualifications 70 without qualifications 65 Request Console Master permission 22 request masters adding work information 94 canceling service requests 93 Command Event Master permission 97 defined 74 opening service request records 92 reopening service requests 93 using Service Request forms 91 viewing Work Info tab 94 working with service requests 91 Request Work Info form 95, 96 Requester Console See also service requests Requester console functions 78 opening 77 user permissions Command Event Master 97 Registered User 74 Request Master 74 Unknown User 74 using 76–79 requester role 21, 74 reserving inventory 173 resolution stage, moving incidents to 137 resolving incidents 135, 141–147 retrying events in order, best practice 98 roles manager 23 requester 21, 74 support staff 22 S scripts about 114 defined 21 Search Criteria area, defined 104
  • 194.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 searching for all records 41 records 35, 38 records associated with people or groups 39 service requests 86 solutions 135–141 Service Level Management. See SLM Service Request form about 98 accessing 91 adding work information 95 search mode 92 viewing work information 95 service requests See also Requester Console accessing Service Request form 91 ad hoc requests 82 adding work information 94, 95 canceling 87, 93 completing surveys 88 creating 80 finding 86 modifying 85 opening records 92 printing 86 reopening 87, 93 request IDs 86 resolving with Solution database 101 Service Request Wizard 80 sorting 83 states 83 troubleshooting 97 updating work info 85 viewing event logs 97 records 84 Work Info tab 94 work information 95 service targets, indicator colors explained 134 SLM about 12 calculations 160 notifications 161 service target indicators 134–135 status and indicators 134 194 "Index Solution database creating entries 150 resolving incidents 101 Solution Database form 151 solutions creating solution database entries 150 searching for 135–141 sorting service requests 83 status values changes during life cycle of incidents 158 selecting 37 Support console, about 104–105 support staff role, about 22 surveys, service request 88 T Task form 128 tasks assigning 129 creating 127–129 recording work 130 working with 127 templates, using 112 terminology changes Help Desk terms 21 Incident Management terms 19 troubleshooting service requests 97 U unassigned incidents, viewing 155 unknown users defined 74 multi-tenancy 75 URL to Incident Management console 30 to main console 77 users registered 74 request master 74 roles 21–23 unknown 74 using inventory 173
  • 195.
    User’s Guide Index! 195 V vendors assigning incidents to 126 communicating assigned incidents to 127 viewing broadcasts 58, 102 event logs 97 incidents 133–135 incidents assigned to people 121 inventory locations 170 profile 37 request details 79 service requests 78, 84 unassigned incidents 155 user requests 79 Work Info tab 94 work information 95 W wizards Process Flow Status 24, 25, 109 Service Request 80 Work Info form 85, 129 Work Info tab viewing 94 work information, adding 51 Work Log Assignments. See tasks
  • 196.
    BMC Remedy ServiceDesk: Incident Management 7.0 196 "Index
  • 198.
    *60845* *60845* *60845* *60845* *60845*